1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Index idx
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
504 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 \begin_layout Chapter
516 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
520 \begin_layout Section
521 Basic File Operations
522 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
534 \begin_layout Standard
539 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
540 in addition to some more advanced operations:
543 \begin_layout Itemize
565 \begin_layout Itemize
581 arg "buffer-new-template"
587 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "buffer-write-as"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Standard
702 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
703 a few minor differences.
706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
717 command lists the available templates.
718 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
719 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
720 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
728 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
735 \begin_layout Standard
736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
769 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
770 is just that — a big, blank space.
778 \begin_layout Standard
799 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
804 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
807 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
825 will reload the document from disk.
826 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
827 and want to restore it to the last save.
836 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
837 them as your changes.
840 \begin_layout Section
841 Basic Editing Features
842 \begin_inset Index idx
845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
854 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
861 \begin_layout Standard
862 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
863 can perform cut and paste operations
864 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
865 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
866 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
867 editing features and how to access
869 We will start with cut and paste.
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 As you might expect, the
877 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
878 various other editing features.
879 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
883 \begin_layout Itemize
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
921 \begin_layout Itemize
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 \begin_layout Itemize
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \begin_inset Index idx
1042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 The first three are self-explanatory.
1075 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1076 and other programs by
1097 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1098 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1103 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1104 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1105 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1106 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1107 into individual cells.
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1116 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1117 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset space ~
1130 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1132 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1148 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1149 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1155 \begin_inset space \space{}
1158 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1159 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1162 \begin_inset space ~
1165 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1184 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1185 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1187 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1191 \begin_inset space ~
1196 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1197 start a new paragraph.
1198 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1199 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1204 \begin_inset space ~
1207 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1224 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 paste from the primary selection.
1228 This is normally the currently selected text.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1258 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1264 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 button to skip the current word.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1301 If the toggle is set, searching for
1302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1313 will not match the word
1314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 Match whole words only
1330 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1331 to only find complete words, e.
1332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 offers also an advanced
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 feature that is described in section
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1380 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1387 \begin_layout Standard
1388 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1403 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1408 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1419 arg "inset-select-all"
1422 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1423 When the cursor is inside an inset
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 selects the content of the inset.
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1441 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1444 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1448 \begin_layout Section
1450 \begin_inset Index idx
1453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1472 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1482 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1488 or the toolbar button
1494 to undo some mistake.
1495 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 or the toolbar button
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1514 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1518 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1521 \begin_layout Standard
1522 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1532 This is a consequence of the 100
1533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1536 step undo limit mentioned above.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1548 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1550 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1554 \begin_layout Section
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1572 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 \begin_layout Itemize
1582 once anywhere in the edit window.
1583 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1587 \begin_layout Enumerate
1592 \begin_layout Itemize
1599 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1605 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1606 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1621 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1626 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1627 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1631 \begin_layout Section
1633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1635 name "sec:Navigating"
1640 \begin_inset Index idx
1643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1727 \begin_layout Subsection
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1740 Navigating ! Outline
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1760 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1761 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1763 \begin_inset space ~
1767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1773 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1774 \begin_inset space ~
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1785 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1791 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1792 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1793 dialog and to modify the citation.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1799 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1800 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1808 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1811 \begin_layout Standard
1812 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1813 you further to control the display.
1818 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1819 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1825 option keeps it in the current view state.
1826 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1830 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1831 \begin_inset space ~
1834 3, the subsections of sections
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1843 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1848 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1858 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1861 \begin_layout Standard
1868 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1869 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1883 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1884 So, for example, you can move section
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1892 2.4 or after section
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 (or the corresponding key bindings
1919 ) you can change the level of sections.
1920 So you can for example make section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_layout Standard
1936 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1937 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1940 \begin_layout Subsection
1941 Horizontal Scrolling
1942 \begin_inset Index idx
1945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1946 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1954 \begin_layout Standard
1956 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1962 \begin_inset space \space{}
1966 \begin_inset space ~
1969 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1970 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1971 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1975 \begin_layout Standard
1976 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1980 \begin_layout Itemize
1982 is used on a small tablet computer
1985 \begin_layout Itemize
1986 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1998 \begin_inset space ~
2011 \begin_layout Itemize
2012 Math constructs with long command names
2015 \begin_layout Standard
2016 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2017 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2019 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2020 windows so that table
2021 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2027 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2032 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2034 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2035 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2038 \begin_layout Standard
2039 \begin_inset Float table
2045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2046 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2051 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2055 Horizontal scrolling test.
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2065 \begin_inset Tabular
2066 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2067 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2069 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2070 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2112 \begin_layout Section
2113 Input/Word Completion
2114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2116 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2121 \begin_inset Index idx
2124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2131 \begin_inset Index idx
2134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Standard
2167 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2169 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2170 is used to propose completions.
2173 \begin_layout Standard
2174 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2177 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2182 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2189 \begin_inset space ~
2193 \begin_inset space ~
2198 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2207 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2208 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2212 \begin_inset space ~
2218 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2219 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2220 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2221 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2224 \begin_layout Standard
2226 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2227 completions available.
2232 key to accept a proposed completion.
2233 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2234 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2235 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2242 \begin_layout Standard
2243 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2244 ing options for text.
2245 The special math option
2249 enables characters to be composed.
2250 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2251 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2254 , you can then input the characters
2255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2266 to a formula to get it.
2267 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2268 of the math toolbar.
2269 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2273 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2274 's installation folder.
2275 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2284 \begin_layout Section
2286 \begin_inset Index idx
2289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2296 \begin_inset Index idx
2299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2328 \begin_inset Index idx
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Standard
2363 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2377 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2380 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2384 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2385 \begin_inset space ~
2389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2391 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2398 \begin_layout Standard
2402 \begin_inset space ~
2410 \begin_inset space ~
2431 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2435 \begin_layout Labeling
2436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2440 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2441 LatexCommand nomenclature
2443 description "Tabulator key"
2449 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2451 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2452 \begin_inset space ~
2456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2458 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2465 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2469 , especially section
2470 \begin_inset space ~
2474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2476 reference "subsec:Lists"
2482 If you are still confused, look in the
2487 \begin_inset Newline newline
2495 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2496 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2500 \begin_layout Labeling
2501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2505 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2506 LatexCommand nomenclature
2508 description "Escape key"
2515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2522 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2523 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2526 \begin_layout Labeling
2527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2533 \begin_inset space ~
2537 \begin_inset space ~
2544 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2545 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2549 \begin_layout Standard
2550 There are three modifier keys:
2553 \begin_layout Labeling
2554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2572 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2573 LatexCommand nomenclature
2575 description "Control key"
2579 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2580 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2584 \begin_layout Itemize
2593 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2596 \begin_layout Itemize
2605 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2608 \begin_layout Itemize
2617 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2621 \begin_layout Labeling
2622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2640 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2641 LatexCommand nomenclature
2643 description "Shift key"
2647 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2648 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2651 \begin_layout Labeling
2652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2670 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2671 LatexCommand nomenclature
2673 description "Alt or Meta key"
2677 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2678 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2679 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2685 \begin_inset Newline newline
2688 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2690 menu accelerator keys
2693 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2694 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2698 \begin_layout Standard
2699 For example, the sequence
2700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2706 \begin_inset space ~
2710 \begin_inset space ~
2716 \begin_inset space ~
2724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2743 \begin_inset space ~
2749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2759 \begin_layout Standard
2764 manual lists all other things bound to the
2772 \begin_layout Standard
2773 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2775 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2776 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2777 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2778 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2779 The \SpecialChar LyX
2780 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2781 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2782 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2784 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2800 followed by a capital
2807 \begin_layout Chapter
2810 \begin_inset Index idx
2813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2823 \begin_layout Section
2825 \begin_inset Index idx
2828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2837 \begin_layout Subsection
2841 \begin_layout Standard
2842 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2843 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2844 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2845 numbering schemes, and so on.
2846 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2847 and format the title of your document differently.
2850 \begin_layout Standard
2855 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2856 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2857 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2858 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2859 picks one for you by default.
2860 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2863 \begin_layout Subsection
2865 \begin_inset Index idx
2868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2877 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2884 \begin_layout Standard
2885 You can select a class using the
2887 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2888 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2892 \begin_inset Index idx
2895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2902 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2906 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2910 \begin_layout Standard
2911 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Article for basic articles
2920 \begin_layout Description
2921 Report for basic reports
2924 \begin_layout Description
2925 Book for writing a book
2928 \begin_layout Description
2929 Letter for US-style letters
2932 \begin_layout Standard
2933 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2934 only uses if you have installed
2935 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2936 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2937 distributions will include
2939 Here are some of the classes.
2940 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2942 Special Document Classes
2951 \begin_layout Description
2952 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2955 \begin_layout Description
2956 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2965 \begin_layout Description
2966 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2967 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2968 There are three article layouts available.
2969 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2970 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2971 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2972 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2977 sequential numbering
2978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2981 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2982 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2983 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2984 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2987 \begin_layout Description
2988 Beamer Layout for presentations
2991 \begin_layout Description
2992 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2993 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2994 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2995 with \SpecialChar LyX
2999 \begin_layout Description
3000 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3003 \begin_layout Description
3005 \begin_inset space ~
3008 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3015 \begin_layout Description
3016 Foils Used to make transparencies
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3021 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3022 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3023 with \SpecialChar LyX
3027 \begin_layout Description
3028 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3029 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3040 \begin_layout Description
3041 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3042 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3043 (Is used by this document.)
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3050 \begin_layout Description
3051 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3054 \begin_layout Description
3059 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3060 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3062 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Slides Used to make transparencies
3070 \begin_layout Description
3072 \begin_inset space ~
3075 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3076 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3079 \begin_layout Description
3080 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3083 \begin_layout Standard
3084 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3086 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3088 Special Document Classes
3095 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3096 of the document classes.
3099 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3107 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3109 \begin_inset Index idx
3112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3129 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3130 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3132 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3135 \begin_layout Standard
3138 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3143 , are highly specialized.
3145 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3146 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3147 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3148 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3149 by some document class.
3150 There are just too many of them.
3151 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3155 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3163 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3164 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3165 document class for a new file.
3167 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3170 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3177 manual for information on how to install them.
3178 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3184 \begin_layout Standard
3185 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3186 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3187 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3188 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3189 class files to be used for dissertation
3190 s submitted to those universities.
3191 The \SpecialChar LyX
3192 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3194 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3198 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3204 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3207 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3211 name "subsec:Modules"
3216 \begin_inset Index idx
3219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3228 \begin_layout Standard
3229 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3230 chosen document class.
3231 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3232 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3243 \begin_inset Index idx
3246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3253 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3257 \begin_layout Standard
3258 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3259 packages or file format converters that are not always
3260 installed by default.
3262 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3263 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3264 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3265 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3267 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3268 file without the missing prerequisites.
3269 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3270 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3273 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3277 \begin_inset Index idx
3280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3281 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3287 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3292 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3295 \begin_layout Standard
3296 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3304 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3306 will advise you about these things.
3314 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3318 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3323 \begin_inset Index idx
3326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3327 Document ! Local Layout
3335 \begin_layout Standard
3336 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3337 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3338 : They are intended to be used in
3339 a variety of different documents.
3340 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3341 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3342 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3343 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3344 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3346 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3364 manual for information on how to use it.
3367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3371 \begin_layout Standard
3372 Each class has a default set of options.
3373 Here's a quick table describing them:
3376 \begin_layout Standard
3377 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3383 \begin_layout Standard
3385 \begin_inset Tabular
3386 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3387 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3388 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3390 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3391 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3392 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3846 \begin_layout Standard
3847 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3853 \begin_layout Standard
3854 You're probably also wondering what
3855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3859 \begin_inset space ~
3863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3867 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3868 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3873 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3878 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3888 headings, there are also
3896 headings, and so on.
3897 We will describe these headings fully in section
3898 \begin_inset space ~
3902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3904 reference "subsec:Headings"
3911 \begin_layout Subsection
3913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3915 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3920 \begin_inset Index idx
3923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3930 \begin_inset Index idx
3933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3942 \begin_layout Standard
3943 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3952 \begin_inset space ~
3960 \begin_inset space ~
3965 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3967 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3968 doesn't support special options you want to
3969 use for your document.
3970 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3971 -class and its options, you have to read
3975 \begin_layout Standard
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3992 \begin_inset space ~
3997 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3998 You can choose between the following five options:
4001 \begin_layout Labeling
4002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4007 Use default page style of current class.
4010 \begin_layout Labeling
4011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4016 No page numbers or headings.
4019 \begin_layout Labeling
4020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_layout Labeling
4029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4034 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4035 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4036 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4037 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4040 \begin_layout Labeling
4041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4046 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4047 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4053 \begin_inset Index idx
4056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4058 -packages ! fancyhdr
4064 How they are defined is explained in section
4065 \begin_inset space ~
4069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4071 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4078 \begin_layout Standard
4079 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4080 \begin_inset space ~
4084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4086 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4094 Paper Size and Orientation
4095 \begin_inset Index idx
4098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4099 Document ! Paper size
4105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4107 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4114 \begin_layout Standard
4115 You can find the following options in the menu
4118 \begin_inset space ~
4125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4129 \begin_inset Index idx
4132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 \begin_layout Labeling
4142 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4146 \begin_inset space ~
4151 What size paper to print on.
4156 \begin_layout Itemize
4162 \begin_layout Itemize
4168 \begin_layout Itemize
4174 \begin_layout Itemize
4180 \begin_layout Itemize
4183 US letter, US legal, US executive
4186 \begin_layout Itemize
4192 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Labeling
4200 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4205 To choose whether to output as
4216 \begin_layout Labeling
4217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4221 \begin_inset space ~
4226 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4227 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4230 \begin_layout Subsection
4232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4234 name "subsec:Margins"
4239 \begin_inset Index idx
4242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4249 \begin_inset Index idx
4252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4261 \begin_layout Standard
4262 Paper margins are set in the menu
4264 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4282 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4283 the paper format and the font size into account.
4286 \begin_layout Subsection
4290 \begin_layout Standard
4291 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4297 That includes the paragraph environments.
4298 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4299 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4300 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4302 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4311 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4313 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4314 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4315 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4318 \begin_layout Section
4319 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4320 \begin_inset Index idx
4323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4324 Paragraph ! Indentation
4332 \begin_layout Subsection
4334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4336 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4343 \begin_layout Standard
4344 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4345 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4348 \begin_layout Standard
4349 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4350 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4351 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4352 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4356 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4362 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4363 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4364 language than English.
4366 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4370 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4371 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4372 into \SpecialChar LyX
4374 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4377 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4379 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4380 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4381 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4388 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4389 goes to produce a printable file.
4394 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4396 gives you the ability globally to change
4400 these pre-coded spacings.
4401 We will explain more later.
4404 \begin_layout Subsection
4405 Paragraph Separation
4406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4408 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4413 \begin_inset Index idx
4416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 Paragraph ! Separation
4425 \begin_layout Standard
4433 \begin_inset space ~
4441 \begin_inset space ~
4448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4452 \begin_inset Index idx
4455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4461 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4464 \begin_layout Subsection
4468 \begin_layout Standard
4469 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4472 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4474 \begin_inset space ~
4479 dialog and toggle the
4482 \begin_inset space ~
4487 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4490 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4494 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4495 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4499 \begin_layout Standard
4500 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4501 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4504 \begin_layout Subsection
4506 \begin_inset Index idx
4509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4510 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4537 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4541 \begin_inset space ~
4550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4551 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4557 \begin_inset Index idx
4560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4562 -packages ! setspace
4567 installed to use this feature.
4572 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4574 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4576 \begin_inset space ~
4581 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4582 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4585 \begin_layout Section
4586 Paragraph Environments
4587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4589 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4594 \begin_inset Index idx
4597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4598 Paragraph ! Environments
4604 \begin_inset Index idx
4607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4608 Paragraph environments|(
4616 \begin_layout Subsection
4620 \begin_layout Standard
4621 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4624 \begin_layout Standard
4633 } \SpecialChar ldots
4643 \begin_inset Newline newline
4646 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4648 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4649 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4650 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4659 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4662 \begin_layout Standard
4663 A paragraph environment is simply a
4664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4671 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4672 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4673 scheme, labels, and so on.
4674 Additionally, you can
4675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4682 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4683 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4684 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4685 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4687 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4689 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4692 \begin_layout Standard
4693 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4694 \begin_inset Graphics
4695 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4701 at the left end of the toolbar.
4703 will change the environment of the
4707 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4708 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4709 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4713 \begin_layout Standard
4722 create a new paragraph using the
4726 paragraph environment.
4728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4735 because if you are in one of these environments:
4738 \begin_layout Itemize
4744 \begin_layout Itemize
4750 \begin_layout Itemize
4756 \begin_layout Itemize
4762 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 \begin_layout Itemize
4774 \begin_layout Itemize
4780 \begin_layout Standard
4782 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4786 , rather than resetting it to
4791 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4792 \begin_inset space ~
4796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4798 reference "sec:Nesting"
4805 \begin_layout Subsection
4809 \begin_layout Standard
4810 The default paragraph environment is
4815 It creates a plain paragraph.
4817 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4818 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4819 this manual) are in the
4826 \begin_layout Standard
4827 You can nest a paragraph using the
4831 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4839 \begin_layout Subsection
4841 \begin_inset Index idx
4844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4853 \begin_layout Standard
4854 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4855 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4864 for thanks or contact information.
4865 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4866 places all of this on a separate page
4867 along with today's date.
4868 For other types of documents, the title
4869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4876 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4880 \begin_layout Standard
4882 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4896 Here's how you use them:
4899 \begin_layout Itemize
4900 Put the title of your document in the
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4908 Put the author name in the
4915 \begin_layout Itemize
4916 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4917 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4923 Note that using this environment is optional.
4924 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4925 will automatically insert today's date.
4926 If you don't want a date, use the option
4928 Suppress default date on front page
4932 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4933 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4935 \begin_inset space ~
4943 \begin_layout Standard
4944 You can use footnotes to insert
4945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4952 or contact information.
4955 \begin_layout Subsection
4957 \begin_inset Index idx
4960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4969 name "subsec:Headings"
4976 \begin_layout Standard
4977 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4979 takes care of the numbering for you.
4982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4984 \begin_inset Index idx
4987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4988 Section headings ! Numbered
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5001 \begin_layout Enumerate
5007 \begin_layout Enumerate
5013 \begin_layout Enumerate
5019 \begin_layout Enumerate
5025 \begin_layout Enumerate
5031 \begin_layout Enumerate
5037 \begin_layout Enumerate
5043 \begin_layout Standard
5045 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5046 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5047 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5050 \begin_layout Standard
5051 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5052 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5053 You group the book into chapters.
5055 does a similar grouping:
5058 \begin_layout Itemize
5063 is divided into either
5074 \begin_layout Itemize
5086 \begin_layout Itemize
5098 \begin_layout Itemize
5110 \begin_layout Itemize
5122 \begin_layout Itemize
5134 \begin_layout Standard
5135 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5143 Not all document types use the
5147 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5152 is the top-level heading.
5160 \begin_layout Standard
5165 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5166 labels it with its number,
5167 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5169 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5183 \begin_inset Index idx
5186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5187 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5195 \begin_layout Standard
5196 The unnumbered section headings have a
5197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5204 at the end of their name.
5205 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5206 the table of contents, see section
5207 \begin_inset space ~
5211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5221 Changing the Numbering
5222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5224 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5231 \begin_layout Standard
5232 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5233 in the Table of Contents.
5234 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5236 Just as certain classes start with
5250 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5260 This is something you can change.
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5270 \begin_inset Index idx
5273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5282 \begin_inset space ~
5286 \begin_inset space ~
5291 you will see two counters.
5296 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5297 numbers a section heading.
5298 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5303 Short Titles of Headings
5304 \begin_inset Index idx
5307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5308 Section headings ! Short titles
5314 \begin_inset Argument 1
5317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5326 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5333 \begin_layout Standard
5334 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5335 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5336 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5337 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5340 \begin_layout Standard
5342 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5343 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5344 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5345 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5350 \begin_inset space ~
5356 This will insert a box labeled
5357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5361 \begin_inset space ~
5365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5368 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5369 This also works for captions inside floats.
5370 There can only be one short title per title.
5373 \begin_layout Standard
5374 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5381 \begin_layout Standard
5382 The following information applies to all section headings:
5385 \begin_layout Itemize
5386 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5389 \begin_layout Itemize
5390 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5393 \begin_layout Itemize
5394 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5397 \begin_layout Itemize
5398 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5401 \begin_layout Subsection
5405 \begin_layout Standard
5407 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5421 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5422 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5423 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5424 the text they contain.
5425 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5433 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5436 \begin_layout Standard
5437 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5446 when you start a new paragraph.
5447 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5451 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5452 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5453 have to change back to the
5457 environment yourself.
5460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5469 \begin_inset Index idx
5472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5481 \begin_layout Standard
5482 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5483 time for the differences.
5492 are identical except for one difference:
5496 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5505 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 Here's an example of the
5522 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5524 See – no indentation!
5528 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5529 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5530 the other paragraph.
5533 \begin_layout Standard
5534 Here's another example, this time in the
5541 \begin_layout Quotation
5547 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5548 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5549 the first line, then
5553 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5557 you were quoting other text.
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5561 Here's a new paragraph.
5562 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5563 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5566 \begin_layout Standard
5567 As the examples show,
5571 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5572 They should put quotes in the
5577 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5581 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5586 \begin_inset Index idx
5589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5596 \begin_inset Index idx
5599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5615 \begin_layout Standard
5620 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5626 \begin_inset Newline newline
5629 Which I did not rehearse!
5633 It could be much worse.
5634 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5636 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5637 indented a bit more than the first.
5638 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5644 \begin_inset Newline newline
5647 And make things look fine
5648 \begin_inset Newline newline
5654 arg "newline-insert newline"
5660 \begin_layout Standard
5665 does not indent both margins.
5666 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5667 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5670 arg "newline-insert newline"
5676 \begin_layout Subsection
5678 \begin_inset Index idx
5681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5697 \begin_layout Standard
5699 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5709 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5710 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5719 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5720 lets you provide your own label.
5721 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5722 describing some general features of all four of them.
5725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5732 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5733 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5742 reset the environment to
5746 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5747 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5748 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5752 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5756 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5763 \begin_layout Standard
5764 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5765 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5766 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5768 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5769 you read all of section
5770 \begin_inset space ~
5774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5776 reference "sec:Nesting"
5783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5785 \begin_inset Index idx
5788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5804 \begin_layout Standard
5805 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5809 paragraph environment.
5810 It has the following properties:
5813 \begin_layout Itemize
5814 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5820 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5828 \begin_layout Itemize
5829 The items can have any length.
5831 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5832 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5839 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 environment inside another
5848 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5852 \begin_layout Itemize
5853 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5856 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 \begin_inset space ~
5867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5869 reference "sec:Nesting"
5873 for a full explanation of nesting.
5877 \begin_layout Standard
5878 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5887 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5890 \begin_layout Standard
5891 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5892 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5895 \begin_layout Itemize
5896 The label for the first level
5900 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5904 \begin_layout Itemize
5905 The label for the second level is a dash.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 Back out to the third level.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back to the second level.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 Back to the outermost level.
5933 \begin_layout Standard
5934 These are the default labels for an
5939 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5944 dialog in the submenu
5949 \begin_inset Index idx
5952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5958 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5962 \begin_layout Standard
5963 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5964 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5966 \begin_inset space ~
5970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5972 reference "sec:Nesting"
5979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5981 \begin_inset Index idx
5984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5993 name "sec:Enumerate"
6000 \begin_layout Standard
6005 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6006 It has these properties:
6009 \begin_layout Enumerate
6010 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6021 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6024 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 environment resets the counter to one.
6032 \begin_layout Enumerate
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6046 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6047 Items can have any length.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6054 \begin_layout Enumerate
6055 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6058 \begin_layout Enumerate
6059 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6063 \begin_layout Standard
6072 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6074 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6075 labels the four different levels in an
6082 \begin_layout Enumerate
6083 The first level of an
6087 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6091 \begin_layout Enumerate
6092 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6105 \begin_layout Enumerate
6106 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 Back to the third level
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the second level.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 Back to the outermost level.
6125 \begin_layout Standard
6126 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6130 environment, see section
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6137 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6142 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6146 \begin_layout Standard
6147 There is more to nesting
6151 environments than we've stated here.
6152 You should read section
6153 \begin_inset space ~
6157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6159 reference "sec:Nesting"
6163 to learn more about nesting.
6166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6168 \begin_inset Index idx
6171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6180 \begin_layout Standard
6181 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6185 list has no fixed label.
6186 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6195 of the first line as the label.
6199 \begin_layout Description
6200 Example: This is an example of the
6207 \begin_layout Standard
6209 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6213 \begin_layout Standard
6215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6222 it is meant that the first usage of the
6226 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6228 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6236 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6242 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6244 \begin_inset space ~
6250 \begin_inset space ~
6254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6256 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6260 for more information.) Here is an example:
6263 \begin_layout Description
6265 \begin_inset space ~
6268 Example: This one shows how to use a
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6283 \begin_layout Description
6284 Usage: You should use the
6288 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6289 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6291 It's not a good idea to use a
6295 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6296 You're better off using
6308 paragraphs into them.
6311 \begin_layout Description
6312 Nesting: You can nest
6316 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6320 \begin_layout Standard
6321 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6322 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6323 them from the first line.
6326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6328 \begin_inset Index idx
6331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6345 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6346 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6350 \begin_layout Standard
6359 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6361 Here are its properties:
6364 \begin_layout Labeling
6365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6367 \begin_inset space ~
6370 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6379 of each line as the item label.
6384 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6385 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6386 space as described above.
6389 \begin_layout Labeling
6390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6391 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6392 uses different margins for the item label and the
6393 body of the item text.
6394 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6395 label width plus a little extra space.
6399 \begin_layout Labeling
6400 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6402 \begin_inset space ~
6405 width \SpecialChar LyX
6406 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6407 If the label width is larger, the label
6408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6415 into the first line.
6416 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6417 margin of the rest of the item text.
6420 \begin_layout Labeling
6421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6426 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6431 environment has the same left margin.
6432 \begin_inset Newline newline
6435 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6438 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6440 \begin_inset space ~
6445 dialog (toolbar button
6448 arg "layout-paragraph"
6455 \begin_inset space ~
6460 determines the default label width.
6461 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6470 multiple times instead.
6471 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6481 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6484 \begin_inset space ~
6489 every time you alter a label in a
6494 \begin_inset Newline newline
6497 The predefined default width is the length of
6498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6506 \begin_inset space ~
6512 \begin_layout Standard
6517 list the same way as the
6521 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6527 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6537 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6539 \begin_inset space ~
6543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6545 reference "sec:Nesting"
6549 to learn about nesting.
6552 \begin_layout Standard
6553 There is yet another feature of the
6557 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6558 left-justifies the item labels by
6560 You can use additional
6564 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6565 justifies the item label.
6570 are documented in section
6571 \begin_inset space ~
6575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6577 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6582 Here are some examples:
6585 \begin_layout Labeling
6586 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6587 Left The default for
6594 \begin_layout Labeling
6595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6596 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6603 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6606 \begin_layout Labeling
6607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6608 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6612 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6619 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6622 \begin_layout Subsection
6624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6626 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6631 \begin_inset Index idx
6634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6643 \begin_layout Standard
6644 The features described in this section require that the module
6646 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6648 is loaded in the document settings.
6649 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6655 \begin_inset Index idx
6658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6660 -packages ! enumitem
6668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6669 Custom Enumerate Lists
6670 \begin_inset Index idx
6673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6674 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6682 \begin_layout Standard
6684 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6690 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6691 There you add the command
6694 \begin_layout Standard
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6715 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6716 Code, look at section
6717 \begin_inset space ~
6721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6723 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6736 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6743 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6744 For capital Roman numerals replace
6756 in the command above.
6757 For Arabic numerals use
6765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6772 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6787 \begin_layout Standard
6789 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6797 You can only number 26
6798 \begin_inset space ~
6801 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6810 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6811 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6815 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6818 \begin_layout Enumerate
6819 \begin_inset Argument 1
6822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6848 \begin_layout Enumerate
6849 \begin_inset Argument 1
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6880 \begin_layout Enumerate
6881 \begin_inset Argument 1
6884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Enumerate
6909 \begin_inset Argument 1
6912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6938 \begin_layout Standard
6939 For this list these commands were used:
6942 \begin_layout Standard
6953 \begin_inset Newline newline
6961 \begin_inset Newline newline
6969 \begin_inset Newline newline
6979 \begin_layout Standard
6986 makes the label emphasized and
6995 \begin_layout Standard
6996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7004 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7005 lists until you change the definition.
7013 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7015 \begin_inset Index idx
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7019 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7027 \begin_layout Standard
7028 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7031 \begin_layout Enumerate
7032 \begin_inset Argument 1
7035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7054 \begin_inset Note Note
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 goes back to default numbering
7066 \begin_layout Enumerate
7070 \begin_layout Standard
7074 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7078 \begin_layout Standard
7079 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7084 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7085 to indicate that it is a resumed
7086 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7087 , but in the output.
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7091 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7099 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7109 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7111 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7112 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7113 of a normal enumeration.
7114 There, insert the command
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7123 \begin_layout Standard
7128 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7132 \begin_layout Enumerate
7136 \begin_layout Enumerate
7140 \begin_layout Standard
7141 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7144 \begin_layout Enumerate
7145 \begin_inset Argument 1
7148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7164 This enumeration starts at 4
7167 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7169 \begin_inset Index idx
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7181 \begin_layout Standard
7182 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7184 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7187 \begin_layout Itemize
7191 \begin_layout Itemize
7192 with standard spacing
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7196 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7198 Add there the command
7202 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7205 \begin_layout Itemize
7206 \begin_inset Argument 1
7209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7228 \begin_layout Itemize
7232 \begin_layout Itemize
7236 \begin_layout Standard
7237 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7244 \begin_inset Index idx
7247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7249 -packages ! enumitem
7255 For more information see its documentation,
7256 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7265 \begin_layout Standard
7266 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7268 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7269 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7273 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7276 \begin_layout Enumerate
7277 \begin_inset Argument 1
7280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7288 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7301 \begin_layout Enumerate
7302 with negative indentation
7305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7306 Further Customization
7307 \begin_inset Index idx
7310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 Lists ! Customization
7319 \begin_layout Standard
7320 You can also change the style of description lists.
7324 \begin_layout Standard
7330 \begin_layout Standard
7331 changes the description label font, the command
7334 \begin_layout Standard
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 sets the list style.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7345 An example where the command
7348 \begin_layout Standard
7353 itshape, style=nextline
7356 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Description
7362 \begin_inset space ~
7366 \begin_inset Argument 1
7369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7377 itshape, style=nextline
7387 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7388 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7392 \begin_layout Description
7394 \begin_inset space ~
7397 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7398 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7399 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7402 \begin_layout Standard
7403 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7409 \begin_inset Index idx
7412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7414 -packages ! enumitem
7420 For more information see its documentation
7421 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7430 \begin_layout Subsection
7432 \begin_inset Index idx
7435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7446 \begin_inset space ~
7449 Address: An Overview
7452 \begin_layout Standard
7453 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7454 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7462 \begin_inset space ~
7468 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7469 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7470 gags on the document.
7471 In contrast, you can use the
7478 \begin_inset space ~
7483 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7484 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7488 \begin_layout Standard
7489 Of course, you're not limited to using
7496 \begin_inset space ~
7505 \begin_inset space ~
7510 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7511 some European academic papers.
7514 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7518 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7525 \begin_layout Standard
7530 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7531 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7535 \begin_inset space ~
7540 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7541 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7542 Here's an example of each:
7545 \begin_layout Right Address
7547 \begin_inset Newline newline
7551 \begin_inset Newline newline
7555 \begin_inset Newline newline
7558 When is it? What is today?
7561 \begin_layout Standard
7565 \begin_inset space ~
7571 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7573 the largest block of text on a single line.
7574 Here's an example of the
7581 \begin_layout Address
7583 \begin_inset Newline newline
7586 Where do I send this
7587 \begin_inset Newline newline
7590 Your post office and country
7593 \begin_layout Standard
7594 As you can see, both
7601 \begin_inset space ~
7606 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7611 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7612 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7618 This makes sense, since
7626 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7627 Thus, you have to use
7634 arg "newline-insert newline"
7639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7640 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7642 \begin_inset space ~
7646 \begin_inset space ~
7651 ) to start a new line in an
7658 \begin_inset space ~
7666 \begin_layout Subsection
7670 \begin_layout Standard
7671 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7672 or list of references.
7674 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7677 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7679 \begin_inset Index idx
7682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7696 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7697 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7698 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7699 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7713 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7714 The book document classes ignores the
7718 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7722 in a letter document class.
7725 \begin_layout Standard
7730 environment does several things for you.
7731 First, it puts the centered label
7732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7740 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7742 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7743 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7744 the subsequent text.
7745 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7747 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7751 \begin_layout Standard
7752 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7756 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7757 The new paragraph will still be in the
7762 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7763 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7766 \begin_layout Standard
7767 \begin_inset Float figure
7772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7774 \begin_inset Graphics
7775 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7783 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7788 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7809 \begin_layout Standard
7810 We would love to demonstrate the
7814 environment, but since this document is in the
7815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7822 class, we can't do this.
7823 We inserted it therefore as figure
7824 \begin_inset space ~
7828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7830 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7835 If you have never heard of an
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7848 \begin_inset Index idx
7851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7860 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7867 \begin_layout Standard
7872 environment is used to list references.
7873 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7874 only use it at the end of the document.
7886 \begin_layout Standard
7887 When you first open a
7891 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7892 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7908 depending on the document class.
7909 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7910 Each paragraph of the
7914 environment is a bibliography entry.
7919 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7920 Each new paragraph is still in the
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7928 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7929 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7931 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7933 handling, have a look at section
7934 \begin_inset space ~
7938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7940 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7947 \begin_layout Subsection
7948 Special Environments
7951 \begin_layout Standard
7953 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7954 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7962 \begin_inset Index idx
7965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7975 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7982 \begin_layout Standard
7988 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7990 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7995 key as a fixed whitespace.
7999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8012 \begin_inset space ~
8017 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8035 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8038 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8041 arg "newline-insert newline"
8058 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8059 So, when you finish using the
8064 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8065 Also, you can nest the
8070 environment inside of others.
8073 \begin_layout Standard
8074 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8077 \begin_layout Itemize
8081 arg "newline-insert newline"
8084 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8089 \begin_inset space \space{}
8099 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 \begin_layout Itemize
8109 arg "newline-insert newline"
8119 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8125 \begin_layout Itemize
8126 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8127 You must put at least one
8131 in any line you want blank.
8132 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8136 \begin_layout Itemize
8137 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8141 since that will insert
8146 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8149 arg "self-insert \""
8155 \begin_layout Standard
8159 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8163 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8167 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8171 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8175 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8176 printf("Hello World!
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout Standard
8190 This is just the standard
8191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8202 \begin_layout Standard
8208 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8210 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8211 as if you used a typewriter.
8212 \begin_inset Index idx
8215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8216 Paragraph environments|)
8221 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8224 Program Code Listings
8229 \begin_inset space ~
8237 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8241 \begin_inset Index idx
8244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8253 \begin_layout Standard
8258 environment is similar to the
8263 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8264 computer console text.
8269 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8283 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8284 you can have empty lines.
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 have a certain language and a text style
8301 \begin_layout Itemize
8302 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8303 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8304 and \SpecialChar TeX
8308 \begin_layout Standard
8309 Because of these properties
8313 works like a typewriter.
8317 \begin_layout Verbatim
8322 \begin_layout Verbatim
8326 The following 2 lines are empty:
8329 \begin_layout Verbatim
8333 \begin_layout Verbatim
8337 \begin_layout Verbatim
8339 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8344 \begin_layout Standard
8349 environment is identical to
8353 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8354 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8361 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8366 \begin_layout Section
8367 Nesting Environments
8368 \begin_inset Index idx
8371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8372 Nesting ! Environments
8378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8387 \begin_layout Subsection
8391 \begin_layout Standard
8393 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8395 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8397 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8399 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8411 \begin_layout Enumerate
8415 \begin_layout Enumerate
8420 \begin_layout Enumerate
8424 \begin_layout Enumerate
8429 \begin_layout Enumerate
8433 \begin_layout Standard
8434 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8435 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8437 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8439 \begin_inset space ~
8443 \begin_inset space ~
8451 \begin_inset space ~
8455 \begin_inset space ~
8460 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8462 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8465 arg "depth-increment"
8471 arg "depth-decrement"
8485 arg "depth-increment"
8491 arg "depth-decrement"
8495 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8496 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8500 \begin_layout Standard
8501 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8502 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8503 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8504 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8505 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8508 \begin_layout Standard
8509 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8511 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8513 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8516 \begin_layout Subsection
8517 What You Can and Can't Nest
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8522 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8527 than a simple yes or no.
8528 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8531 \begin_layout Itemize
8532 Completely unnestable
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8540 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8545 \begin_layout Standard
8546 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8547 environments have them:
8550 \begin_layout Description
8551 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8552 Can't nest into them.
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8568 \begin_layout Itemize
8574 \begin_layout Itemize
8580 \begin_layout Itemize
8587 \begin_layout Description
8589 \begin_inset space ~
8592 Nestable You can nest them.
8593 You can nest other things into them.
8597 \begin_layout Itemize
8603 \begin_layout Itemize
8609 \begin_layout Itemize
8615 \begin_layout Itemize
8621 \begin_layout Itemize
8627 \begin_layout Itemize
8633 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8646 \begin_layout Itemize
8652 \begin_layout Itemize
8659 \begin_layout Description
8660 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8661 You can't nest anything into them.
8665 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_inset space ~
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Standard
8761 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8769 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8779 \begin_inset space ~
8782 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8783 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8784 nested section headings violate this.
8792 \begin_layout Subsection
8793 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8794 \begin_inset Index idx
8797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8798 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8806 \begin_layout Standard
8807 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8808 affected by nesting anyhow.
8812 \begin_layout Itemize
8816 \begin_layout Itemize
8820 \begin_layout Itemize
8824 \begin_layout Standard
8826 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8834 Figures and tables in
8838 are not affected by this.
8843 Have a look at section
8844 \begin_inset space ~
8848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8850 reference "sec:Floats"
8854 for more information about
8861 \begin_layout Standard
8863 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8864 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8868 \begin_layout Standard
8869 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8877 of its own, it behaves just like a
8878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8885 paragraph environment.
8886 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8890 \begin_layout Standard
8891 Here's an example with a table:
8894 \begin_layout Enumerate
8899 \begin_layout Enumerate
8900 This is (a) and it's nested.
8904 \begin_layout Standard
8905 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8911 \begin_layout Standard
8913 \begin_inset Tabular
8914 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8915 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8916 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8917 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9001 \begin_layout Standard
9002 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9009 \begin_layout Enumerate
9011 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9015 \begin_layout Enumerate
9019 \begin_layout Standard
9020 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9023 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 \begin_layout Enumerate
9029 This is (a) and it's nested.
9033 \begin_layout Standard
9034 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9042 \begin_inset Tabular
9043 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9044 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9045 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9046 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9130 \begin_layout Standard
9131 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9137 \begin_layout Enumerate
9144 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9147 \begin_layout Enumerate
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9156 \begin_layout Standard
9157 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9160 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9169 This is (a) and it's nested.
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9173 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9179 \begin_layout Standard
9181 \begin_inset Tabular
9182 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9183 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9184 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9185 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9270 \begin_layout Standard
9271 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9277 \begin_layout Enumerate
9279 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9286 \begin_layout Enumerate
9290 \begin_layout Standard
9291 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9297 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9298 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9302 \begin_layout Subsection
9303 Usage and General Features
9306 \begin_layout Standard
9307 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9308 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9317 is the innermost possible depth.
9318 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9321 \begin_layout Enumerate
9322 level #1 – outermost
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9346 \begin_layout Itemize
9355 \begin_layout Standard
9356 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9357 both of them in the example.
9358 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9368 For example, if we tried to nest another
9373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9380 , we would get errors.
9383 \begin_layout Subsection
9385 \begin_inset Index idx
9388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9397 \begin_layout Standard
9398 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9399 We have several examples of nested environments.
9400 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9404 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9405 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9408 \begin_layout Labeling
9409 \labelwidthstring MMM
9410 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9419 \begin_layout Labeling
9420 \labelwidthstring MMM
9421 #2-a This is level #2.
9422 We created it by using
9425 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9431 arg "depth-increment"
9438 \begin_layout Labeling
9439 \labelwidthstring MMM
9440 #3-a This is level #3.
9441 This time, we just enter
9448 arg "depth-increment"
9452 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9456 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9462 arg "depth-increment"
9469 \begin_layout Standard
9474 environment, nested inside of
9475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9483 So, it's at level #4.
9484 We did this by entering
9487 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9493 arg "depth-increment"
9496 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9501 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9517 \begin_layout Standard
9522 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9525 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9531 \begin_layout Labeling
9532 \labelwidthstring MMM
9533 #4-a This is level #4.
9537 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9540 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9545 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9549 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9554 keep nesting things inside
9555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9566 \begin_layout Labeling
9567 \labelwidthstring MMM
9568 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9573 \begin_layout Labeling
9574 \labelwidthstring MMM
9575 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9576 and this is level #6.
9577 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9581 \begin_layout Labeling
9582 \labelwidthstring MMM
9583 #5-b Back to level #5.
9587 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9593 arg "depth-decrement"
9600 \begin_layout Labeling
9601 \labelwidthstring MMM
9605 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9611 arg "depth-decrement"
9614 , we're back at level #4.
9618 \begin_layout Labeling
9619 \labelwidthstring MMM
9620 #3-b Back to level #3.
9621 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9625 \begin_layout Labeling
9626 \labelwidthstring MMM
9627 #2-b Back to level #2.
9632 \begin_layout Labeling
9633 \labelwidthstring MMM
9634 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9635 After this sentence, we will enter
9639 and change the paragraph environment back to
9646 \begin_layout Standard
9647 We could have also used the
9663 environment in place of the
9668 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9671 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9672 Example 2: Inheritance
9675 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9676 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9679 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9688 arg "depth-increment"
9692 \begin_inset Newline newline
9695 which, we will change to the
9703 \begin_layout Enumerate
9708 environment, at level #2.
9711 \begin_layout Enumerate
9712 Notice how the nested
9716 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9720 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9724 \begin_layout Standard
9725 We ended this example by entering
9730 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9734 and reset the nesting depth by using
9737 arg "depth-decrement"
9743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9744 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9753 \begin_inset Argument 1
9756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9757 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9765 \begin_layout Enumerate
9766 This is level #1, in an
9770 paragraph environment.
9771 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9775 \begin_layout Enumerate
9780 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9786 arg "depth-increment"
9790 Now, what happens if we nest an
9794 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9795 label be? An asterisk?
9799 \begin_layout Itemize
9809 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9810 So, its label is a bullet.
9811 (We got here by using
9814 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9820 arg "depth-increment"
9823 , then changing the environment to
9831 \begin_layout Itemize
9832 Here's level #4, produced using
9835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9841 arg "depth-increment"
9845 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9850 \begin_layout Enumerate
9853 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9858 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9862 , because we are in the
9870 environment (that is, it is an
9885 \begin_layout Enumerate
9890 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9891 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9895 \begin_layout Enumerate
9896 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9899 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9902 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9905 \begin_layout Enumerate
9909 arg "depth-decrement"
9912 to decrease the depth after the next
9915 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9924 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9929 \begin_layout Enumerate
9931 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9932 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9936 \begin_layout Enumerate
9937 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9946 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9951 reset the counter for the label.
9955 \begin_layout Enumerate
9959 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9965 arg "depth-decrement"
9968 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9969 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9970 into the twofold-nested
9978 \begin_layout Enumerate
9979 The same thing happens if we do another
9982 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9988 arg "depth-decrement"
9991 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9994 \begin_layout Standard
9995 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10000 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10011 The number of other
10015 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10022 The same rule applies for the
10026 environment, as well.
10029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10030 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10033 \begin_layout Enumerate
10034 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10035 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10036 the same detail with how we did it.
10045 \begin_layout Standard
10053 arg "depth-increment"
10060 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10061 the example in parentheses someplace.
10062 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10063 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10064 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10068 \begin_layout Enumerate
10073 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10077 \begin_layout Verse
10078 Now we will add verse.
10079 \begin_inset Newline newline
10082 It will get much worse.
10083 \begin_inset Newline newline
10093 arg "depth-increment"
10103 \begin_layout Verse
10104 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10105 \begin_inset Newline newline
10108 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10109 \begin_inset Newline newline
10115 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10123 \begin_layout Verse
10124 Here comes a table:
10128 \begin_layout Standard
10129 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10135 \begin_layout Standard
10137 \begin_inset Tabular
10138 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10139 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10140 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10141 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10226 \begin_layout Verse
10230 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10240 arg "depth-increment"
10246 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10252 \begin_inset Newline newline
10260 arg "depth-decrement"
10267 \begin_layout Enumerate
10272 : level #1) This is another item.
10273 Note that selecting a
10277 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10278 3 times to put the table inside the
10286 \begin_layout Quotation
10287 We're now ending the
10291 list and changing to
10296 We're still at level #1.
10297 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10298 The next set of paragraphs is a
10299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10306 We will nest both the
10313 \begin_inset space ~
10318 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10322 for the letter body.
10326 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10329 to preserve the depth.
10330 Remember that you need to use
10333 arg "newline-insert newline"
10336 to create multiple lines inside the
10343 \begin_inset space ~
10353 \begin_layout Right Address
10355 \begin_inset Newline newline
10358 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10359 \begin_inset Newline newline
10365 \begin_layout Address
10367 \begin_inset space ~
10373 \begin_layout Quotation
10374 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10378 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10379 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10380 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10381 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10382 as soon as possible.
10383 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10386 \begin_layout Quotation
10387 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10388 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10389 with your order, along with payment.
10392 \begin_layout Quotation
10393 We thank you again for your patience.
10396 \begin_layout Address
10398 \begin_inset Newline newline
10405 \begin_layout Quotation
10406 That ends that example!
10409 \begin_layout Standard
10410 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10411 gives you a lot of power with just
10413 We could have easily nested an
10434 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10437 \begin_layout Subsection
10439 \begin_inset Index idx
10442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10443 Nesting ! Separation
10449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10451 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10458 \begin_layout Standard
10459 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10461 For example you need two different enumerations:
10464 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10474 \begin_layout Enumerate
10478 \begin_layout Standard
10479 \begin_inset Separator plain
10485 \begin_layout Itemize
10491 \begin_layout Standard
10492 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10498 \begin_layout Enumerate
10502 \begin_layout Enumerate
10506 \begin_layout Enumerate
10510 \begin_layout Standard
10511 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10512 list item and use the menu
10514 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10515 Start New Environment
10518 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10519 ) and behind it the new list.
10522 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10523 Start New Parent Environment
10525 only appears if the item is nested.
10526 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10530 \begin_layout Standard
10531 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10532 (red arrow in LyX).
10533 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10534 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10537 \begin_layout Standard
10538 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10541 arg "paragraph-break"
10548 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10551 \begin_layout Section
10552 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10553 \begin_inset Index idx
10556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10565 \begin_layout Standard
10566 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10567 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10569 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10570 be broken at the end of a line.
10571 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10575 \begin_layout Subsection
10577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10579 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10584 \begin_inset Index idx
10587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10596 \begin_layout Standard
10597 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10598 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10599 ) not to break the line at
10601 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10604 \begin_layout Quote
10605 Further documentation is given in section
10606 \begin_inset Newline newline
10610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10612 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10620 \begin_layout Standard
10621 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10636 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10645 A protected space is set with
10647 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10648 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10650 \begin_inset space ~
10658 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10664 \begin_layout Subsection
10666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10668 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10673 \begin_inset Index idx
10676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10677 Spacing ! Horizontal
10685 \begin_layout Standard
10686 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10689 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10693 The length units are listed in Appendix
10694 \begin_inset space ~
10698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10700 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10707 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10711 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10716 \begin_inset Index idx
10719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10720 Spaces ! Inter-word
10728 \begin_layout Standard
10729 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10730 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10731 at the ends of sentences.
10732 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10733 automatically takes care about this.
10734 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10735 followed by a period; see section
10736 \begin_inset space ~
10740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10742 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10747 To insert a normal space, select
10749 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10750 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10752 \begin_inset space ~
10760 arg "space-insert normal"
10766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10770 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10775 \begin_inset Index idx
10778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10787 \begin_layout Standard
10789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10796 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10805 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10806 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10807 inside abbreviations:
10810 \begin_layout Quote
10812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10816 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10819 \begin_layout Standard
10820 or between values and units.
10821 Compare for example this:
10822 \begin_inset Newline newline
10826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10830 \begin_inset Newline newline
10833 10 kg (normal space
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10837 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10839 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10840 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10842 \begin_inset space ~
10850 arg "space-insert thin"
10856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10860 \begin_layout Standard
10861 You can also insert the following space types:
10864 \begin_layout Description
10866 \begin_inset space ~
10870 \begin_inset space ~
10873 space A line with a
10874 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10878 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10882 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10885 negative thin space between the arrows.
10888 \begin_layout Description
10890 \begin_inset space ~
10894 \begin_inset space ~
10897 space A line with a
10898 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10902 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10906 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10909 negative medium space between the arrows.
10912 \begin_layout Description
10914 \begin_inset space ~
10918 \begin_inset space ~
10921 space A line with a
10922 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10926 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10930 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10933 negative thick space between the arrows.
10936 \begin_layout Description
10938 \begin_inset space ~
10942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10946 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10950 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10954 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10958 \begin_inset space ~
10962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10965 em) space between the arrows.
10968 \begin_layout Description
10970 \begin_inset space ~
10974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10978 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10982 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10986 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10990 \begin_inset space ~
10994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 em) space between the arrows.
11000 \begin_layout Description
11002 \begin_inset space ~
11006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11010 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11014 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11018 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11022 \begin_inset space ~
11026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11029 em) space between the arrows.
11032 \begin_layout Description
11034 \begin_inset space ~
11038 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11042 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11047 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11054 cm space between the arrows.
11057 \begin_layout Standard
11059 \begin_inset space ~
11063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11065 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11069 lists the different space sizes.
11072 \begin_layout Standard
11073 \begin_inset Float table
11078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11079 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11084 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11088 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11098 \begin_inset Tabular
11099 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11100 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11101 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11102 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11218 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11377 \begin_inset Index idx
11380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11389 \begin_layout Standard
11390 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11391 feature for adding extra space
11392 in a uniform fashion.
11393 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11394 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11395 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11396 equally between themselves.
11399 \begin_layout Standard
11400 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11403 \begin_layout Quote
11405 This is on the left side
11406 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11409 This is on the right
11412 \begin_layout Quote
11415 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11419 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11425 \begin_layout Quote
11428 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11432 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_layout Standard
11443 That was an example in the
11449 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11457 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11460 is one in a standard paragraph.
11461 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11465 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11468 \begin_layout Standard
11469 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11472 \begin_inset space ~
11477 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11480 \begin_layout Standard
11482 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11486 \begin_inset space ~
11492 \begin_layout Standard
11494 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11498 \begin_inset space ~
11504 \begin_layout Standard
11506 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11516 \begin_layout Standard
11518 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11522 \begin_inset space ~
11528 \begin_layout Standard
11530 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11534 \begin_inset space ~
11540 \begin_layout Standard
11542 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11546 \begin_inset space ~
11552 \begin_layout Standard
11553 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11561 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11565 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11567 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11568 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11572 option in the space dialog.
11580 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11584 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11589 \begin_inset Index idx
11592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11602 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11603 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11607 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11610 What is correct English?:
11611 \begin_inset Newline newline
11615 \begin_inset Newline newline
11619 \begin_inset space ~
11622 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11623 \begin_inset Newline newline
11627 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11638 \begin_inset Newline newline
11642 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11653 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11659 \begin_layout Standard
11661 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11666 \begin_inset space ~
11670 \begin_inset space ~
11674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11678 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11681 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11685 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_inset space ~
11699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11702 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11711 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11712 That is why it is named
11713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11721 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11722 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11726 \begin_layout Subsection
11728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11730 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11735 \begin_inset Index idx
11738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11747 \begin_layout Standard
11748 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11751 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11753 \begin_inset space ~
11759 There you find the following sizes:
11762 \begin_layout Standard
11775 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11776 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11781 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11784 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11786 \begin_inset space ~
11792 \begin_inset Index idx
11795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11796 Document ! Settings
11801 for the paragraph separation.
11802 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11813 \begin_layout Standard
11819 \begin_inset Index idx
11822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11828 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11829 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11834 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11835 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11844 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11853 s are described in section
11854 \begin_inset space ~
11858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11860 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11869 If there are several
11873 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11874 You can therefore use
11878 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11881 \begin_layout Standard
11886 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11887 \begin_inset space ~
11891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11893 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11900 \begin_layout Standard
11901 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11911 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11912 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11924 \begin_layout Subsection
11925 Paragraph Alignment
11926 \begin_inset Index idx
11929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11930 Paragraph ! Alignment
11938 \begin_layout Standard
11939 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11941 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11944 dialog (toolbar button
11947 arg "layout-paragraph"
11951 There are five possibilities:
11954 \begin_layout Itemize
11962 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11968 \begin_layout Itemize
11976 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11982 \begin_layout Itemize
11990 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11996 \begin_layout Itemize
12004 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12010 \begin_layout Itemize
12018 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12024 \begin_layout Standard
12025 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12026 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12027 the left and right margins.
12028 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12031 \begin_layout Standard
12033 This paragraph is right aligned,
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 this one is centered,
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12043 this one is left aligned.
12046 \begin_layout Subsection
12048 \begin_inset Index idx
12051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12052 Page breaks ! Forced
12058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12060 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12067 \begin_layout Standard
12068 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12069 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12070 force a page break where you want one.
12071 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12072 is good at page breaking.
12073 Only if you use a lot of
12077 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12078 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12081 \begin_layout Standard
12082 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12083 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12087 have to change the page breaking.
12090 \begin_layout Standard
12091 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12093 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12096 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12098 \begin_inset space ~
12104 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12107 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12109 \begin_inset space ~
12114 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12116 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12117 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12120 \begin_layout Standard
12121 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12122 at the top of a page.
12123 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12125 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12126 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12127 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12131 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12135 to learn more about
12142 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12146 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12151 \begin_inset Index idx
12154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12155 Page breaks ! Clear
12163 \begin_layout Standard
12164 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12165 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12166 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12167 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12168 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12171 \begin_layout Standard
12172 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12175 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12177 \begin_inset space ~
12183 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12186 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12188 \begin_inset space ~
12192 \begin_inset space ~
12197 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12198 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12201 \begin_layout Subsection
12203 \begin_inset Index idx
12206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12215 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12222 \begin_layout Standard
12223 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12225 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12228 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12230 \begin_inset space ~
12234 \begin_inset space ~
12242 arg "newline-insert newline"
12246 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12255 \begin_inset space ~
12263 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12266 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12268 This is useful to avoid
12269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12276 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12279 \begin_layout Standard
12280 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12281 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12283 very good at line breaking.
12284 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12285 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12286 \begin_inset space ~
12290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12292 reference "sec:Quote"
12297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12299 reference "sec:Verse"
12304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12306 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12313 \begin_layout Subsection
12315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12317 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12322 \begin_inset Index idx
12325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12334 \begin_layout Standard
12336 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12347 \begin_layout Standard
12351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12352 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12354 \begin_inset space ~
12359 you can insert horizontal lines.
12360 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12361 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12362 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12365 \begin_layout Standard
12367 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12378 \begin_layout Section
12379 Characters and Symbols
12382 \begin_layout Standard
12383 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12384 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12385 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12393 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12397 for information on how this is done.
12400 \begin_layout Standard
12401 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12406 dialog via the menu
12408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12409 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12415 \begin_layout Standard
12416 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12424 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12425 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12427 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12435 \begin_layout Section
12436 Fonts and Text Styles
12437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12439 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12446 \begin_layout Subsection
12448 \begin_inset Index idx
12451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12460 \begin_layout Standard
12461 There are two types of fonts:
12464 \begin_layout Description
12466 \begin_inset space ~
12470 \begin_inset Index idx
12473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12479 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12484 characters) in the font.
12485 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12486 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12487 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12488 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12489 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12490 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12491 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12492 \begin_inset Newline newline
12495 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12496 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12497 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12498 sizes than at small ones.
12499 \begin_inset Newline newline
12513 \begin_inset space ~
12521 \begin_layout Description
12523 \begin_inset space ~
12527 \begin_inset Index idx
12530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12536 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12537 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12538 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12539 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12540 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12541 image manipulation program.
12542 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12543 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12544 \begin_inset space ~
12547 pixels high up to 34
12548 \begin_inset space ~
12551 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12552 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12553 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12555 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12556 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12557 \begin_inset Newline newline
12560 Bitmap fonts are named
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12568 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12571 \begin_layout Standard
12572 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12573 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12574 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12575 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12576 use scalable fonts.
12579 \begin_layout Standard
12580 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12583 \begin_layout Standard
12584 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12585 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12586 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12587 font to emphasize text, you use an
12588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12596 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12598 In \SpecialChar LyX
12599 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12603 \begin_layout Subsection
12606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12608 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12615 \begin_layout Standard
12616 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12617 used its own fonts.
12618 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12619 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12622 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12623 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12624 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12625 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12626 to a word processor.
12627 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12628 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12629 files are very portable across
12630 different machines.
12631 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12632 has increased a lot
12633 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12636 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12638 \begin_inset space ~
12642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12644 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12649 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 code in the document
12651 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12654 \begin_layout Standard
12655 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12656 engines that are also able directly
12657 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12659 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12661 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12663 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12664 that is installed on your system.
12665 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12668 \begin_layout Standard
12669 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12677 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12678 es; so you might have to experiment.
12686 \begin_layout Subsection
12687 Document Font and Font size
12688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12690 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12695 \begin_inset Index idx
12698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12705 \begin_inset Index idx
12708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12717 \begin_layout Standard
12718 You can set the document fonts in the
12720 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12724 \begin_inset Index idx
12727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12728 Document ! Settings
12738 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12739 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12742 \begin_inset space ~
12751 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12753 \begin_inset space ~
12756 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12759 \begin_layout Standard
12764 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12765 This requires that you use
12777 as the output format, i.
12778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12782 \begin_inset space \space{}
12785 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12786 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12787 installed (see section
12788 \begin_inset space ~
12792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12794 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12799 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12801 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12802 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12804 \begin_inset space ~
12807 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12808 cannot determine the family.
12809 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12810 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12813 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12816 \begin_layout Standard
12817 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12818 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12823 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12829 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12830 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12838 \begin_inset space ~
12844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12857 European Computer Modern
12860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12867 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12870 \begin_layout Standard
12879 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12880 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12885 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12888 \begin_inset space ~
12893 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12899 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12900 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12903 \begin_layout Itemize
12907 \begin_inset space ~
12912 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12925 \begin_inset space ~
12930 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12931 community in order to replace
12935 as the default font.
12936 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12937 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12940 \begin_inset space ~
12953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12954 One difference is improved kerning.
12962 \begin_layout Itemize
12966 \begin_inset space ~
12970 \begin_inset space ~
12975 fonts in (the rare) case that
12978 \begin_inset space ~
12983 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12998 Virtual means that it
12999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13010 -glyphs from other fonts.
13011 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13033 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13039 \begin_inset Index idx
13042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13044 -packages ! aeguill
13049 with the document preamble line
13050 \begin_inset Newline newline
13057 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13058 \begin_inset Newline newline
13063 will fix the guillemet problem.
13068 and that accented characters are not
13072 glyph, but built of
13076 characters, the accent and the letter.
13077 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13083 If you search for example for the French word
13084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13091 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13100 and not for the glyph
13101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13105 \begin_inset space ~
13109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13115 \begin_layout Itemize
13116 If you do not like the look of
13124 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13129 \begin_inset space ~
13135 \begin_inset space ~
13145 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13146 \begin_inset space ~
13149 serif and typewriter fonts,
13153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13154 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13161 \begin_inset space ~
13170 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13175 \begin_inset space \space{}
13183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13187 \begin_inset space \space{}
13193 \begin_inset space ~
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13211 but you can also select your own.
13212 \begin_inset Newline newline
13215 The differences between roman,
13218 \begin_inset space ~
13227 fonts are explained in section
13228 \begin_inset space ~
13232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13234 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13239 \begin_inset Newline newline
13245 \begin_inset space ~
13250 was originally designed for newspapers.
13251 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13252 into the small newspaper columns.
13256 \begin_inset space ~
13261 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13264 \begin_layout Standard
13265 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13278 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13283 depends on the class you are using.
13284 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13287 \begin_layout Standard
13288 Note that the font size is the
13293 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13294 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13295 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13296 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13299 \begin_inset space ~
13305 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13306 \begin_inset space ~
13310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13312 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13319 \begin_layout Standard
13323 \begin_inset space ~
13328 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13330 \begin_inset space ~
13333 serif or typewriter.
13338 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13348 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13351 \begin_layout Standard
13356 LaTeX font encoding
13358 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13359 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13365 \begin_inset Index idx
13368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13370 -packages ! fontenc
13376 \begin_inset space ~
13380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13382 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13387 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13388 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13395 \begin_layout Standard
13396 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13398 Use Old Style Figures
13402 Use True Small Caps
13405 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13408 Use Old Style Figures
13410 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13412 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13420 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13424 Use True Small Caps
13426 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13427 of scaled capitals.
13428 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13429 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13432 \begin_layout Standard
13437 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13438 a font to display the script characters.
13442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13443 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13449 \begin_inset Index idx
13452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13459 So this has no effect for the document language
13473 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13477 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13485 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13490 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13491 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13493 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13498 dialog, see section
13499 \begin_inset space ~
13503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13505 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13517 \begin_layout Subsection
13521 \begin_layout Standard
13522 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13523 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13525 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13526 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13527 choose a math font in the dialog
13529 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13533 \begin_inset Index idx
13536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13537 Document ! Settings
13543 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13544 automatically selects a math font.
13545 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13546 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13555 \begin_inset space ~
13561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13566 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13567 document font is available.
13570 \begin_layout Standard
13571 Note that the math font will not be used for
13575 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13581 or by the insertion of the command
13588 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13589 \begin_inset space ~
13593 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13594 while the math characters do not.
13596 \begin_inset space ~
13599 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13602 \begin_inset space ~
13610 \begin_inset space ~
13615 in the document font settings.
13618 \begin_layout Standard
13619 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13620 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13621 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13622 font (in most cases
13623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13629 \begin_inset space ~
13635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13638 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13639 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13647 \begin_inset space ~
13653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13659 \begin_layout Subsection
13660 Using Different Character Styles
13661 \begin_inset Index idx
13664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13671 \begin_inset Index idx
13674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13683 \begin_layout Standard
13684 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13685 automatically changes the character style for certain
13686 paragraph environments.
13688 supports two character styles,
13697 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13701 \begin_layout Standard
13706 style, do one of the following:
13709 \begin_layout Itemize
13710 click on the toolbar button
13719 \begin_layout Itemize
13720 use the key binding
13729 \begin_layout Standard
13730 These commands are all toggles.
13735 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13738 \begin_layout Standard
13739 One typically uses the
13743 style for proper names.
13745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13752 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13760 \begin_layout Standard
13761 A more widely used character style is the
13766 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13773 \begin_layout Itemize
13774 clicking on the toolbar button
13783 \begin_layout Itemize
13784 using the keybindings
13793 \begin_layout Standard
13798 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13800 use a different font.
13803 \begin_layout Standard
13804 We've been using the
13808 style all over the place in this document.
13809 Here's one more example:
13812 \begin_layout Quotation
13815 Do not overuse character styles!
13818 \begin_layout Standard
13819 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13820 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13821 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13822 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13826 \begin_layout Standard
13827 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13835 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13837 \begin_inset space ~
13840 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13846 arg "dialog-show character"
13852 \begin_layout Subsection
13853 Fine-Tuning with the
13858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13860 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13865 \begin_inset Index idx
13868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13877 \begin_layout Standard
13878 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13880 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13881 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13882 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13883 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13884 from ordinary dialog.
13887 \begin_layout Standard
13888 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13889 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13890 \begin_inset Newline newline
13893 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13894 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13897 \begin_layout Standard
13898 To use custom character styles, open the
13900 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13902 \begin_inset space ~
13905 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13908 dialog or press the toolbar button
13911 arg "dialog-show character"
13915 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13916 font property that you can choose.
13917 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13920 \begin_inset space ~
13925 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13930 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13931 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13932 environments all at once.
13935 \begin_layout Standard
13936 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13939 \begin_inset space ~
13951 \begin_layout Labeling
13952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13966 The possible options are:
13970 \begin_layout Labeling
13971 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13976 This is the Roman font family.
13977 Normally a serif font.
13978 It's also the default family.
13988 \begin_layout Labeling
13989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13993 \begin_inset space ~
14000 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14012 \begin_layout Labeling
14013 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14020 This is the Typewriter font family.
14026 arg "font-typewriter"
14035 \begin_layout Labeling
14036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14041 This corresponds to the print weight.
14046 \begin_layout Labeling
14047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14052 This is the Medium font series.
14053 It's also the default series.
14056 \begin_layout Labeling
14057 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14064 This is the Bold font series.
14077 \begin_layout Labeling
14078 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14083 As the name implies.
14088 \begin_layout Labeling
14089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14094 This is the Upright font shape.
14095 It's also the default shape.
14098 \begin_layout Labeling
14099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14113 s the Italic font shape
14119 \begin_layout Labeling
14120 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14127 This is the Slanted font shape
14129 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14130 , this is different from italic).
14133 \begin_layout Labeling
14134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14138 \begin_inset space ~
14145 This is the Small caps font shape
14152 \begin_layout Labeling
14153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14158 Alters the text color.
14159 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14163 \begin_inset space ~
14168 , which means that the document default color set in
14170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14171 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14177 \begin_inset space ~
14182 is used, you can choose between
14259 \begin_inset Index idx
14262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14271 \begin_layout Labeling
14272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14277 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14278 the language of the document.
14279 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14280 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14282 \begin_inset Newline newline
14285 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14287 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14288 When using the spell checking (see section
14289 \begin_inset space ~
14293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14295 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14299 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14302 \begin_layout Labeling
14303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14308 Alters the size of the font.
14309 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14310 proportional to the document font size.
14311 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14312 the details, but a general description of what
14318 \begin_layout Labeling
14319 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14340 arg "font-size tiny"
14346 \begin_layout Labeling
14347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14368 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14374 \begin_layout Labeling
14375 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14396 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14402 \begin_layout Labeling
14403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14424 arg "font-size small"
14430 \begin_layout Labeling
14431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14445 It's also the default size.
14449 arg "font-size normal"
14455 \begin_layout Labeling
14456 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14477 arg "font-size large"
14483 \begin_layout Labeling
14484 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14505 arg "font-size larger"
14511 \begin_layout Labeling
14512 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14533 arg "font-size largest"
14539 \begin_layout Labeling
14540 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14561 arg "font-size huge"
14567 \begin_layout Labeling
14568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14589 arg "font-size giant"
14595 \begin_layout Labeling
14596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14601 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14621 arg "font-size increase"
14627 \begin_layout Labeling
14628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14633 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14653 arg "font-size decrease"
14660 \begin_layout Standard
14665 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14666 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14668 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14669 — use those instead.
14670 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14673 \begin_layout Labeling
14674 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14679 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14684 \begin_layout Labeling
14685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14692 This is text with emphasize on
14695 This might seem like the same as
14699 , but it is actually a bit different.
14705 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14707 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14710 \begin_layout Labeling
14711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14718 This is text with Underbar on.
14724 arg "font-underline"
14730 \begin_inset Newline newline
14735 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14736 when you could not change fonts.
14737 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14738 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14739 because some people
14743 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14746 \begin_layout Labeling
14747 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14751 \begin_inset space ~
14758 This is text with Double underbar on.
14764 arg "font-underunderline"
14768 \begin_inset Newline newline
14771 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14772 about double underbar.
14775 \begin_layout Labeling
14776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14780 \begin_inset space ~
14787 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14793 arg "font-underwave"
14797 \begin_inset Newline newline
14800 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14801 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14804 \begin_layout Labeling
14805 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14812 This is text with Strikeout on.
14818 arg "font-strikeout"
14822 \begin_inset Newline newline
14825 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14826 changed in the meantime.
14829 \begin_layout Labeling
14830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14837 This is text with Noun on.
14844 , this is a logical attribute.
14845 Normally it's equivalent to
14848 \begin_inset space ~
14857 \begin_layout Standard
14858 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14859 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14861 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14863 \begin_inset space ~
14866 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14872 arg "dialog-show character"
14875 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14876 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14879 arg "textstyle-apply"
14883 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14887 \begin_layout Standard
14888 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14895 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14896 (suppose you just set the shape to
14897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14915 \begin_inset space ~
14927 \begin_layout Standard
14928 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14936 \begin_inset space ~
14948 \begin_layout Itemize
14954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14961 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14979 \begin_inset Newline newline
14983 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14997 \begin_inset Note Note
15000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15001 For more on phantoms see section
15002 \begin_inset space ~
15006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15008 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15018 \begin_inset Newline newline
15024 \begin_layout Itemize
15029 fonts use characters with serifs.
15030 These are the small
15031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15038 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15039 The following example shows the difference:
15040 \begin_inset Newline newline
15044 \begin_inset Newline newline
15049 text without serifs
15052 \begin_inset Newline newline
15055 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15056 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15063 \begin_layout Itemize
15068 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15069 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15070 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15073 \begin_layout Standard
15074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15081 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15082 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15085 \begin_inset space ~
15090 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15091 the property to be removed.
15092 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15093 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15094 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15112 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15113 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15121 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15125 \begin_inset space ~
15130 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15141 If you, for example, set
15142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15160 \begin_inset space ~
15165 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15174 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15177 \begin_layout Standard
15178 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15179 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15182 \begin_layout Section
15183 Printing and Previewing
15186 \begin_layout Subsection
15190 \begin_layout Standard
15191 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15192 using \SpecialChar LyX
15193 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15194 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15195 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15196 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15198 Additional Features
15203 \begin_layout Standard
15205 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15208 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15209 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15210 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15213 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15214 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15215 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15216 to turn your writing into printable output.
15217 This happens in two stages:
15220 \begin_layout Enumerate
15221 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15222 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15224 a file with the extension,
15225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15239 \begin_layout Enumerate
15240 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15241 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15242 to use the commands in the
15246 file to produce printable output.
15249 \begin_layout Subsection
15250 Output file formats
15251 \begin_inset Index idx
15254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15263 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15271 Simple text (ASCII)
15272 \begin_inset Index idx
15275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15276 File formats ! ASCII
15284 \begin_layout Standard
15285 This file type has the extension
15286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15298 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15302 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15309 \begin_layout Standard
15310 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15312 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15313 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15315 \begin_inset space ~
15321 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15322 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15323 bibliography (section
15324 \begin_inset space ~
15328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15330 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15335 If your document includes such material, use
15337 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15338 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15340 \begin_inset space ~
15344 \begin_inset space ~
15348 \begin_inset space ~
15356 \begin_inset space ~
15360 \begin_inset space ~
15366 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15367 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15373 \begin_inset Index idx
15376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15377 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15386 \begin_layout Standard
15387 This file type has the extension
15388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15399 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15402 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15403 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15404 -Errors or to process it manually
15405 with console commands.
15406 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15407 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15408 's temporary directory whenever you
15409 view or export your document.
15412 \begin_layout Standard
15413 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15414 -file using the menu
15416 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15417 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15421 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15422 export variants are explained in section
15423 \begin_inset space ~
15427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15429 reference "subsec:Export"
15436 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15438 \begin_inset Index idx
15441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15450 \begin_layout Standard
15451 This file type has the extension
15452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15472 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15473 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15474 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15478 \begin_layout Standard
15479 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15480 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15481 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15482 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15483 when you view the DVI.
15484 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15487 \begin_layout Standard
15488 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15490 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15491 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15496 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15497 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15499 \begin_inset space ~
15505 The latter option uses the program
15507 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15513 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15516 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15517 font access (see section
15518 \begin_inset space ~
15522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15524 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15529 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15530 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15537 \begin_inset Index idx
15540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15541 File formats ! PostScript
15549 \begin_layout Standard
15550 This file type has the extension
15551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15563 PostScript was developed by the company
15567 as a printer language.
15568 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15570 PostScript can be seen as a
15571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15574 programming language
15575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15578 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15583 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15590 \begin_inset Index idx
15593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15595 -packages ! pstricks
15605 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15608 \begin_layout Standard
15609 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15613 Encapsulated PostScript
15614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15617 (EPS, file extension
15618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15630 As \SpecialChar LyX
15631 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15632 convert them in the background to EPS.
15633 If, for example, you have 50
15634 \begin_inset space ~
15637 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15639 \begin_inset space ~
15642 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15643 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15645 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15646 EPS to avoid this problem.
15649 \begin_layout Standard
15650 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15652 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15653 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15659 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15661 \begin_inset Index idx
15664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15671 \begin_inset Index idx
15674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15683 \begin_layout Standard
15684 This file type has the extension
15685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15701 Portable Document Format
15702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15709 was derived from PostScript.
15710 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15719 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15720 looks exactly the same.
15723 \begin_layout Standard
15724 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15728 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15732 (JPG, file extension
15733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15760 Portable Network Graphics
15761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15764 (PNG, file extension
15765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15777 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15778 converts them in the
15779 background to one of these formats.
15780 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15781 will slow down your workflow.
15782 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15785 \begin_layout Standard
15786 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15788 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15794 \begin_layout Description
15796 \begin_inset space ~
15799 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15803 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15806 \begin_layout Description
15808 \begin_inset space ~
15815 ) This uses the program
15817 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15820 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15823 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15826 is a new engine, derived from
15830 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15831 access (see section
15832 \begin_inset space ~
15836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15838 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15843 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15844 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15849 \begin_layout Description
15851 \begin_inset space ~
15858 ) This uses the program
15863 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15869 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15870 font access (see section
15871 \begin_inset space ~
15875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15877 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15882 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15883 vertically written Japanese.
15886 \begin_layout Description
15888 \begin_inset space ~
15891 (cropped) This is the same as
15894 \begin_inset space ~
15899 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15900 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15901 to generate good-looking
15902 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15905 \begin_layout Description
15907 \begin_inset space ~
15910 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15914 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15918 \begin_layout Description
15920 \begin_inset space ~
15923 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15927 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15928 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15932 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15933 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15936 \begin_layout Standard
15940 \begin_inset space ~
15949 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15950 works without problems.
15951 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15952 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15956 \begin_inset space ~
15964 \begin_inset space ~
15969 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15979 \begin_inset Index idx
15982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15983 FileFormats ! XHTML
15989 \begin_inset Index idx
15992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16001 \begin_layout Standard
16002 This file type has the extension
16003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16015 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16016 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16017 When \SpecialChar LyX
16018 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16019 suitable for the purpose.
16020 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16023 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16026 between different formats, which are described in section
16028 Math Output in XHTML
16033 \begin_inset space ~
16041 \begin_layout Standard
16042 XHTML output remains
16043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16050 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16051 features are supported yet.
16055 and the World Wide Web
16059 Additional Features
16061 manual, for more information.
16064 \begin_layout Standard
16065 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16067 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16068 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16074 \begin_layout Subsection
16076 \begin_inset Index idx
16079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16088 \begin_layout Standard
16089 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16090 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16099 or use the toolbar button
16106 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16107 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16108 \begin_inset space ~
16112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16114 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16118 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16120 \begin_inset space ~
16124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16126 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16131 Further output formats can be selected via
16133 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16134 View (Other Formats)
16136 or the toolbar button
16145 \begin_layout Standard
16146 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16147 viewer window using the menu
16149 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16155 Update (Other Formats)
16160 \begin_layout Standard
16161 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16164 To have a real output, export your document.
16167 \begin_layout Section
16168 A few Words about Typography
16169 \begin_inset Index idx
16172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16181 \begin_layout Subsection
16182 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16183 \begin_inset Index idx
16186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16193 \begin_inset Index idx
16196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16205 \begin_layout Standard
16206 In \SpecialChar LyX
16208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16219 character comes in four lengths: the
16231 , and the minus sign:
16232 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16238 \begin_layout Standard
16239 \begin_inset Tabular
16240 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16241 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16242 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16243 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16244 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16245 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16274 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16314 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16339 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16341 \begin_inset space ~
16344 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16351 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16378 \begin_inset space ~
16381 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16402 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16436 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16442 \begin_layout Standard
16443 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 character multiple times in a row.
16456 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16457 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16490 \begin_layout Standard
16491 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16492 math mode and has a length of its own.
16493 Here are some examples:
16496 \begin_layout Enumerate
16497 line- and page-breaks
16498 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16508 \begin_layout Enumerate
16510 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16520 \begin_layout Enumerate
16521 Oh — there's a dash.
16522 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16532 \begin_layout Enumerate
16533 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16537 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16547 \begin_layout Subsection
16549 \begin_inset Index idx
16552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16561 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16568 \begin_layout Standard
16569 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16570 but automatically in the output.
16571 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16577 \begin_inset Index idx
16580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16587 following the rules of the document language.
16590 \begin_layout Standard
16592 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16596 font and with unusual constructs, like
16597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16605 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16606 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16607 This is done with the menu
16609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16610 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16612 \begin_inset space ~
16618 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16620 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16624 \begin_layout Standard
16625 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16626 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16637 would then see the hyphen
16638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16645 as a hyphenation possibility.
16646 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16647 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16648 as described in section
16650 Prevent Hyphenation
16655 \begin_inset space ~
16663 \begin_layout Subsection
16665 \begin_inset Index idx
16668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16677 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16678 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16681 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16688 \begin_layout Standard
16689 When \SpecialChar LyX
16690 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16691 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16693 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16699 appropriate amount of space.
16700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16703 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16705 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16706 gets after another word.
16709 \begin_layout Standard
16710 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16711 not work in all cases.
16713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16724 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16725 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16728 \begin_layout Standard
16729 Here are some examples of
16733 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16736 \begin_layout Itemize
16741 \begin_layout Itemize
16746 \begin_layout Standard
16747 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16750 \begin_layout Itemize
16752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16756 this is too much space!
16759 \begin_layout Itemize
16764 \begin_layout Standard
16765 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16768 \begin_layout Standard
16769 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16772 \begin_layout Enumerate
16776 \begin_inset space ~
16781 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16782 \begin_inset space ~
16786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16788 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16793 \begin_inset Index idx
16796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16797 Spaces ! inter-word
16805 \begin_layout Enumerate
16809 \begin_inset space ~
16814 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16815 \begin_inset space ~
16819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16821 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16826 \begin_inset Index idx
16829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16838 \begin_layout Enumerate
16842 \begin_inset space ~
16846 \begin_inset space ~
16850 \begin_inset space ~
16857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16859 \begin_inset space ~
16864 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16865 This function is also bound to
16868 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16874 \begin_layout Standard
16875 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16878 \begin_layout Itemize
16880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16884 \begin_inset space \space{}
16887 this is too much space!
16890 \begin_layout Itemize
16891 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16895 \begin_layout Standard
16896 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16897 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16899 will take care of this.
16902 \begin_layout Standard
16903 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16907 \begin_inset space ~
16913 feature described in the section
16915 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16920 Additional Features
16925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16927 \begin_inset Index idx
16930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16931 Typography ! Quotes
16937 \begin_inset Index idx
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16971 \begin_layout Standard
16973 usually sets quotes correctly.
16974 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16975 and use a closing quote at the end.
16977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16985 The keyboard character,
16989 , generates this automatically.
16992 \begin_layout Standard
16993 You can specify what character the
16997 key produces using the submenu
17003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17007 \begin_inset Index idx
17010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17011 Document ! Settings
17021 There are six choices:
17024 \begin_layout Labeling
17025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17048 \begin_layout Labeling
17049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17052 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17056 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17061 Use quotes like ”this”
17064 \begin_layout Labeling
17065 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17068 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17072 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17078 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17082 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17088 \begin_layout Labeling
17089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17092 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17096 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17102 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17106 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17112 \begin_layout Labeling
17113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17116 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17120 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17126 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17130 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17136 \begin_layout Labeling
17137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17140 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17144 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17150 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17154 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17160 \begin_layout Standard
17161 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17164 arg "quote-insert single"
17170 \begin_layout Subsection
17172 \begin_inset Index idx
17175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17176 Typography ! Ligatures
17182 \begin_inset Index idx
17185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17216 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17223 \begin_layout Standard
17224 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17225 print them as single characters.
17226 These groups are known as
17231 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17232 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17234 Here are the standard ligatures:
17237 \begin_layout Itemize
17241 \begin_layout Itemize
17245 \begin_layout Itemize
17249 \begin_layout Itemize
17253 \begin_layout Itemize
17257 \begin_layout Standard
17258 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17261 \begin_layout Standard
17262 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17263 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17271 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17287 To break a ligature, use
17289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17290 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17292 \begin_inset space ~
17299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17310 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17327 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17335 \begin_layout Subsection
17337 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17339 \begin_inset Index idx
17342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17352 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17359 \begin_layout Standard
17362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17363 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17367 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17370 \begin_layout Description
17372 The name of the game.
17375 \begin_layout Description
17377 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17381 \begin_layout Description
17383 The \SpecialChar TeX
17384 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17388 \begin_layout Description
17389 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17390 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17394 \begin_layout Standard
17395 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17401 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17409 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17410 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17411 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17412 converges to the number
17413 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17416 : The actual version is
17417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17425 , the previous one was
17426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17437 \begin_layout Subsection
17439 \begin_inset Index idx
17442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17451 \begin_layout Standard
17452 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17453 space between two words.
17454 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17464 for units use the menu
17466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17467 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17469 \begin_inset space ~
17477 arg "space-insert thin"
17483 \begin_layout Standard
17484 Here is an example to show the differences:
17487 \begin_layout Standard
17488 \begin_inset Tabular
17489 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17490 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17491 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17492 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17499 \begin_inset space ~
17503 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17515 space between number and unit
17522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17531 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17543 half space between number and unit
17556 \begin_layout Subsection
17558 \begin_inset Index idx
17561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17562 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17570 \begin_layout Standard
17571 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17573 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17574 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17575 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17576 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17577 These bits of text became known as
17588 \begin_layout Standard
17589 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17590 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17591 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17592 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17593 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17594 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17595 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17596 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17597 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17598 \begin_inset Newline newline
17606 \begin_inset Newline newline
17614 \begin_inset Newline newline
17617 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17618 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17619 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17621 \begin_inset space ~
17625 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17627 key "latexcompanion"
17632 \begin_inset space ~
17636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17642 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17643 's page break mechanism.
17646 \begin_layout Chapter
17647 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17650 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17657 \begin_layout Standard
17658 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17661 \begin_inset space ~
17667 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17670 \begin_layout Section
17672 \begin_inset Index idx
17675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17691 \begin_layout Standard
17693 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17696 \begin_layout Description
17699 \begin_inset space ~
17702 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17703 \begin_inset Newline newline
17707 \begin_inset Note Note
17710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17711 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17719 \begin_layout Description
17720 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17721 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17722 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17725 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17726 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17728 \begin_inset space ~
17734 \begin_inset Newline newline
17738 \begin_inset Note Comment
17741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17742 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17751 \begin_layout Description
17753 \begin_inset space ~
17756 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17757 set in the document settings under
17759 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17761 \begin_inset space ~
17767 \begin_inset Newline newline
17771 \begin_inset Newline newline
17775 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17784 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17785 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17790 of a comment that appears in the output.
17796 \begin_inset Newline newline
17800 \begin_inset Newline newline
17803 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17806 \begin_layout Standard
17807 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17819 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17822 \begin_layout Section
17824 \begin_inset Index idx
17827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17836 name "sec:Footnotes"
17843 \begin_layout Standard
17845 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17851 or the toolbar button
17854 arg "footnote-insert"
17866 \begin_inset Graphics
17867 filename clipart/footnote.png
17876 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17877 's representation of your footnote.
17887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17906 label, the box will
17910 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17911 Clicking on the box label again will close
17924 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17925 and click on the footnote
17940 \begin_layout Standard
17941 Here is an example footnote:
17949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17950 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17958 \begin_layout Standard
17959 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17960 position where the footnote box is placed.
17961 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17962 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17963 according to the document class.
17965 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17966 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17972 ey are described in the
17975 \begin_inset space ~
17983 \begin_layout Section
17985 \begin_inset Index idx
17988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17997 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18004 \begin_layout Standard
18005 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18007 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18011 \begin_inset space ~
18016 or the toolbar button
18019 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18045 appearing within your text.
18046 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18047 's representation of your margin
18056 \begin_layout Standard
18057 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18061 \begin_inset Marginal
18064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18066 This is a marginal note.
18074 \begin_layout Standard
18075 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18076 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18077 pages, right on odd pages.
18080 \begin_layout Standard
18081 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18084 \begin_inset space ~
18092 \begin_inset space ~
18100 \begin_layout Section
18101 Graphics and Images
18102 \begin_inset Index idx
18105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18112 \begin_inset Index idx
18115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18124 name "sec:Graphics"
18131 \begin_layout Standard
18132 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18133 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18136 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18141 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18145 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18148 \begin_layout Standard
18149 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18154 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18155 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18157 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18158 \begin_inset space ~
18162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18164 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18171 \begin_layout Standard
18176 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18177 of the image in the output.
18178 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18182 \begin_inset space ~
18186 \begin_inset space ~
18195 \begin_inset space ~
18199 \begin_inset space ~
18203 \begin_inset space ~
18208 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18209 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18217 \begin_layout Standard
18221 \begin_inset space ~
18225 \begin_inset space ~
18230 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18231 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18233 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18238 \begin_inset space ~
18243 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18244 with the image size is printed.
18247 \begin_layout Standard
18248 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18249 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18251 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18254 \begin_layout Standard
18256 \begin_inset Graphics
18257 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18265 \begin_layout Standard
18266 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18267 the image into a float, see section
18268 \begin_inset space ~
18272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18274 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18281 \begin_layout Subsection
18283 \begin_inset Index idx
18286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18295 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18302 \begin_layout Standard
18303 You can insert images in any known file format.
18304 But as we explained in section
18305 \begin_inset space ~
18309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18311 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18315 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18317 therefore uses the program
18321 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18322 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18323 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18324 \begin_inset space ~
18328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18330 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18337 \begin_layout Standard
18338 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18341 \begin_layout Description
18343 \begin_inset space ~
18346 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18347 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18348 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18352 Graphics Interchange Format
18353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18356 (GIF, file extension
18357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18369 \begin_inset Index idx
18372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18404 Portable Network Graphics
18405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18408 (PNG, file extension
18409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18421 \begin_inset Index idx
18424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18456 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18460 (JPG, file extension
18461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18485 \begin_inset Index idx
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18519 \begin_layout Description
18521 \begin_inset space ~
18524 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18526 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18527 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18528 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18529 \begin_inset Newline newline
18532 Scalable image formats can be
18533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18536 Scalable Vector Graphics
18537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18540 (SVG, file extension
18541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18553 \begin_inset Index idx
18556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18588 Encapsulated PostScript
18589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18592 (EPS, file extension
18593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18605 \begin_inset Index idx
18608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18640 Portable Document Format
18641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18644 (PDF, file extension
18645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18657 \begin_inset Index idx
18660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18675 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18676 result will not be scalable.
18677 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18683 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18691 \begin_layout Standard
18692 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18699 \begin_layout Subsection
18700 Grouping of Image Settings
18701 \begin_inset Index idx
18704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18705 Images ! Settings grouping
18713 \begin_layout Standard
18714 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18716 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18717 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18719 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18720 need to manually change each of them.
18724 \begin_layout Standard
18725 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18728 \begin_inset space ~
18732 \begin_inset space ~
18744 \begin_inset space ~
18748 \begin_inset space ~
18754 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18755 and checking the name of the desired group.
18758 \begin_layout Section
18760 \begin_inset Index idx
18763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18779 \begin_layout Standard
18780 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18783 arg "tabular-insert"
18788 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18792 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18793 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18794 from the rest of the table.
18795 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18796 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18798 Here is an example table:
18801 \begin_layout Standard
18803 \begin_inset Tabular
18804 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18805 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18806 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18807 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19009 \begin_layout Subsection
19013 \begin_layout Standard
19014 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19017 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19021 This brings up the table dialog.
19022 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19023 cursor is placed currently.
19024 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19025 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19026 done on all of your selection.
19029 \begin_layout Standard
19030 In addition to the table dialog, the
19033 \begin_inset space ~
19038 helps you in setting table properties.
19039 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19042 \begin_layout Standard
19046 \begin_inset space ~
19051 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19052 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19053 current cell respectively.
19054 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19056 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19057 of text, see section
19058 \begin_inset space ~
19062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19064 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19071 \begin_layout Standard
19072 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19073 using the check box
19082 This will merge the cells to
19086 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19087 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19088 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19089 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19090 in the last row without the upper border:
19093 \begin_layout Standard
19095 \begin_inset Tabular
19096 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19097 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19098 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19099 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19100 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19101 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19112 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19121 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19197 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19232 \begin_layout Standard
19233 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19234 -arguments for the table.
19235 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19236 explained in the chapter
19243 \begin_inset space ~
19249 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19250 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19251 but are visible in the output.
19254 \begin_layout Standard
19255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19263 Most DVI-viewers are
19267 able to display rotations.
19275 \begin_layout Standard
19280 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19285 adds lines for all cell borders.
19288 \begin_layout Subsection
19290 \begin_inset Index idx
19293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19294 Tables ! Multi-page
19300 \begin_inset Index idx
19303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19312 \begin_layout Standard
19313 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19316 \begin_inset space ~
19320 \begin_inset space ~
19328 \begin_inset space ~
19333 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19334 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19337 \begin_layout Description
19342 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19343 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19344 Except for the first page, if
19347 \begin_inset space ~
19355 \begin_layout Description
19359 \begin_inset space ~
19364 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19365 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19368 \begin_layout Description
19373 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19374 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19375 except for the last page, if
19378 \begin_inset space ~
19386 \begin_layout Description
19390 \begin_inset space ~
19395 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19396 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19399 \begin_layout Description
19400 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19401 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19407 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19410 \begin_inset space ~
19418 \begin_layout Standard
19419 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19420 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19421 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19427 In this context, first means first in this order:
19430 \begin_inset space ~
19442 \begin_inset space ~
19447 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19450 \begin_layout Standard
19452 \begin_inset Tabular
19453 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19454 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19455 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19456 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19457 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19458 <row endfirsthead="true">
19459 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19465 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19470 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19479 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19489 <row endfirsthead="true">
19490 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19510 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19522 <row endhead="true">
19523 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19534 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19543 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19553 <row endhead="true">
19554 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19586 <row endfoot="true">
19587 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19607 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19638 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20588 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20608 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21568 <row endlastfoot="true">
21569 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21606 \begin_layout Subsection
21608 \begin_inset Index idx
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21620 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21627 \begin_layout Standard
21628 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21629 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21630 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21631 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21635 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21638 \begin_layout Standard
21639 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21640 for the column in the table dialog.
21641 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21642 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21646 \begin_layout Standard
21648 \begin_inset Tabular
21649 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21650 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21651 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21652 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21653 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21673 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21742 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21798 This is longer now.
21803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21855 This is longer now.
21860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 \begin_layout Standard
21887 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21888 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21893 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21894 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21900 Selection with the mouse or with
21904 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21905 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21906 the selection from outside the table.
21909 \begin_layout Section
21911 \begin_inset Index idx
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21930 \begin_layout Subsection
21934 \begin_layout Standard
21935 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21936 have a fixed location.
21938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21945 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21953 \begin_inset space ~
21958 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21959 too many notes on the current page.
21962 \begin_layout Standard
21963 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21964 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21965 and pages without text.
21966 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21967 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21968 Floats are therefore numbered.
21969 Referencing is described in section
21970 \begin_inset space ~
21974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21976 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21983 \begin_layout Standard
21984 To insert a float, use the menu
21986 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21990 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21991 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21993 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21994 \begin_inset Index idx
21997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22004 paragraph within the float.
22005 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22006 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22007 left-clicking on the box label.
22008 A closed float box looks like this:
22009 \begin_inset Graphics
22010 filename clipart/float.png
22015 – a gray button with a red label.
22018 \begin_layout Standard
22019 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22021 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22024 \begin_layout Subsection
22026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22028 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22033 \begin_inset Index idx
22036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22037 Floats ! Figure floats
22045 \begin_layout Standard
22047 \begin_inset space ~
22051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22053 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22057 was created using the menu
22059 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22060 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22066 arg "float-insert figure"
22070 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22073 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22079 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22083 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22084 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22086 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22088 \begin_inset space ~
22096 arg "layout-paragraph"
22102 \begin_layout Standard
22103 \begin_inset Float figure
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22110 \begin_inset Graphics
22111 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22126 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22130 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22143 \begin_layout Standard
22144 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22145 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22156 ) and refer to it using the menu
22158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22164 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22168 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22169 vague references like
22170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22177 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22178 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22188 For more about cross-references, see section
22189 \begin_inset space ~
22193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22195 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22202 \begin_layout Standard
22203 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22204 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22205 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22206 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22207 as described in section
22208 \begin_inset space ~
22212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22214 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22220 \begin_inset space ~
22224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22226 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22230 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22231 You can also set the images one below the other.
22233 \begin_inset space ~
22237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22239 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22246 reference "fig:Platypus"
22250 are the subfigures.
22253 \begin_layout Standard
22254 \begin_inset Float figure
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22264 \begin_inset Float figure
22269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22275 name "fig:Undefinable"
22287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22288 \begin_inset Graphics
22289 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22300 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22304 \begin_inset Float figure
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22310 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22315 name "fig:Platypus"
22327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22328 \begin_inset Graphics
22329 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22341 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22353 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22357 Two distorted images.
22370 \begin_layout Subsection
22372 \begin_inset Index idx
22375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 Floats ! Table floats
22384 \begin_layout Standard
22385 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22388 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22391 or the toolbar button
22394 arg "float-insert table"
22398 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22399 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22400 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22402 \begin_inset space ~
22406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22408 reference "tab:Table-float"
22415 \begin_layout Standard
22416 \begin_inset Float table
22421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22427 name "tab:Table-float"
22439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 \begin_inset Tabular
22442 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22443 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22444 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22445 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22446 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22573 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22594 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22597 \end{array}\right]$
22605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22639 \begin_layout Subsection
22641 \begin_inset Index idx
22644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22653 \begin_layout Standard
22655 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22656 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22657 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22659 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22667 \begin_inset space ~
22675 \begin_layout Section
22677 \begin_inset Index idx
22680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22689 \begin_layout Standard
22691 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22693 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22694 \begin_inset space \space{}
22701 \begin_layout Standard
22702 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22703 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22709 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22710 and its alignment within the page.
22713 \begin_layout Standard
22715 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22725 height_special "totalheight"
22730 backgroundcolor "none"
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 This is a minipage.
22737 The text is set in an italic style.
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22744 another formatting.
22752 \begin_layout Standard
22753 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22756 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22760 as described in section
22761 \begin_inset space ~
22765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22767 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22772 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22778 \begin_layout Standard
22779 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22789 height_special "totalheight"
22794 backgroundcolor "none"
22797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22799 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22805 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22809 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22819 height_special "totalheight"
22824 backgroundcolor "none"
22827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22828 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22829 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22837 \begin_layout Standard
22838 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22844 \begin_layout Standard
22845 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22847 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22854 \begin_inset space ~
22862 \begin_layout Chapter
22863 Mathematical Formulas
22864 \begin_inset Index idx
22867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22874 \begin_inset Index idx
22877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22908 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22915 \begin_layout Standard
22916 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22921 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22924 \begin_layout Section
22926 \begin_inset Index idx
22929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22938 \begin_layout Standard
22939 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22952 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22954 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22955 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22956 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22964 \begin_layout Standard
22965 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22969 \begin_inset space ~
22974 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22977 \begin_layout Standard
22978 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22979 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22982 \begin_layout Standard
22983 This is a line with an inline formula
22984 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22990 \begin_layout Standard
22991 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22992 paragraph, like this one:
22993 \begin_inset Formula
23000 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23003 \begin_layout Standard
23005 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23007 For example, typing
23008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23021 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23022 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23026 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23029 \begin_inset space ~
23037 \begin_layout Subsection
23038 Navigating in Formulas
23039 \begin_inset Index idx
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23051 \begin_layout Standard
23052 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23053 achieved with the arrow keys.
23055 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23056 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23061 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23062 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23066 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23070 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23073 \end{array}\right]$
23081 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23086 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23087 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23090 \begin_layout Standard
23095 , printed in this document as
23096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23100 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23107 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23108 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23109 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23114 For example, if you want
23115 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23123 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23133 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23137 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23142 , since in the latter case only the
23145 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23150 will be under the square root sign:
23151 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23157 \begin_layout Standard
23158 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23160 \begin_inset Formula
23162 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23171 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23172 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23175 \begin_layout Subsection
23179 \begin_layout Standard
23180 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23181 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23185 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23186 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23187 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23188 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23189 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23193 \begin_layout Subsection
23194 Exponents and Subscripts
23195 \begin_inset Index idx
23198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23205 \begin_inset Index idx
23208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23217 \begin_layout Standard
23218 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23221 arg "math-superscript"
23227 arg "math-subscript"
23230 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23232 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23235 , type in a formula
23238 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23248 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23254 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23258 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23264 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23270 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23279 , you have to use an extra
23283 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23284 For example, if you want
23285 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23291 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23297 Subscripts are similar: To get
23298 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23304 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23312 \begin_layout Subsection
23314 \begin_inset Index idx
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23326 \begin_layout Standard
23327 Create a fraction either with the command
23333 or by using the icon
23336 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23342 \begin_inset space ~
23348 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23349 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23350 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23355 To move back up, press
23360 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23361 \begin_inset Formula
23363 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23366 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23374 \begin_layout Subsection
23376 \begin_inset Index idx
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23388 \begin_layout Standard
23389 Roots can be created using the
23392 \begin_inset space ~
23400 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23406 arg "math-insert \\root"
23428 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23434 always produces a square root.
23437 \begin_layout Subsection
23438 Operators with Limits
23439 \begin_inset Index idx
23442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23449 \begin_inset Index idx
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23461 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23468 \begin_layout Standard
23470 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23474 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23477 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23478 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23479 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23480 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23481 The sum operator will automatically place its
23482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23489 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23491 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23495 \begin_inset Formula
23497 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23502 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23506 \begin_layout Standard
23507 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23509 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23510 behind the operator and using the menu
23512 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23513 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23515 \begin_inset space ~
23519 \begin_inset space ~
23533 \begin_layout Standard
23534 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23543 \begin_inset Index idx
23546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 \begin_inset Formula
23555 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23560 which will place the
23561 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23573 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23574 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23580 \begin_layout Standard
23581 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23588 Have a look at section
23589 \begin_inset space ~
23593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23595 reference "subsec:Functions"
23599 for an explanation of function macros.
23602 \begin_layout Subsection
23604 \begin_inset Index idx
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23616 \begin_layout Standard
23617 Most math symbols can be found in the
23620 \begin_inset space ~
23625 under one of several categories; including
23642 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23646 \begin_layout Standard
23647 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23648 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23649 don't have to use the
23652 \begin_inset space ~
23657 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23659 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23662 \begin_layout Subsection
23664 \begin_inset Index idx
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23676 \begin_layout Standard
23677 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23683 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23689 \begin_inset space ~
23697 arg "math-insert \\space"
23701 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23702 For example, the sequence
23707 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23710 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23712 \begin_inset Graphics
23713 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23718 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23719 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23720 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23721 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23722 , because they are negative
23724 Here are two examples:
23727 \begin_layout Standard
23737 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23743 \begin_layout Standard
23753 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23759 \begin_layout Subsection
23761 \begin_inset Index idx
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23773 name "subsec:Functions"
23780 \begin_layout Standard
23784 \begin_inset space ~
23789 contains under the button
23792 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23795 a number of function macros, such as
23796 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23800 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23808 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23815 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23816 avoid confusions, because
23817 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23821 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23827 \begin_layout Standard
23828 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23830 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23834 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23840 \begin_layout Standard
23841 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23842 are placed, as described in section
23843 \begin_inset space ~
23847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23849 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23856 \begin_layout Subsection
23858 \begin_inset Index idx
23861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 \begin_layout Standard
23871 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23873 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23874 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23875 commands, for example, to enter
23876 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23879 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23880 Our example is entered by typing
23885 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23892 \begin_inset space ~
23896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23898 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23902 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23905 \begin_layout Standard
23906 \begin_inset Float table
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23917 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23921 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 \begin_inset Tabular
23932 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23933 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23936 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24074 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24128 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24182 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24344 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24398 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24452 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24497 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24518 \begin_layout Standard
24519 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24522 \begin_inset space ~
24530 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24533 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24537 \begin_layout Section
24538 Brackets and Delimiters
24539 \begin_inset Index idx
24542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24549 \begin_inset Index idx
24552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24561 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24568 \begin_layout Standard
24569 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24571 For some purposes, using just the keys
24576 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24577 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24578 toolbar delimiter icon
24581 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24585 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24586 \begin_inset Formula
24588 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24596 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24597 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24601 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24604 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24610 \begin_inset Formula
24612 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24620 \begin_layout Standard
24621 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24622 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24626 \begin_layout Standard
24627 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24628 left side and right side.
24629 If you use the option
24632 \begin_inset space ~
24637 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24638 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24640 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24645 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24646 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24649 \begin_layout Standard
24650 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24651 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24652 is to go inside the brackets.
24653 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24658 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24659 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24660 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24664 arg "math-delim ( )"
24670 \begin_layout Section
24671 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24672 \begin_inset Index idx
24675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24682 \begin_inset Index idx
24685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24692 \begin_inset Index idx
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24704 \begin_layout Standard
24705 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24709 \begin_inset space ~
24717 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24721 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24722 Here is an example:
24723 \begin_inset Formula
24725 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24734 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24735 \begin_inset space ~
24739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24741 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24746 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24747 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24748 This alignment is set in the box
24753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24802 for every column as default.
24803 For example, the sequence
24804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24815 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24816 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24817 corresponds to the relevant column.
24818 The result will look like this:
24819 \begin_inset Formula
24822 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24823 column & has & has\,right\\
24824 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24833 \begin_layout Standard
24834 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24837 arg "newline-insert newline"
24840 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24841 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24843 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24846 or the math toolbar.
24849 \begin_layout Standard
24850 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24851 It can be created with the menu
24853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24854 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24856 \begin_inset space ~
24868 Here is an example:
24869 \begin_inset Formula
24883 \begin_layout Standard
24884 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24887 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24890 arg "newline-insert newline"
24894 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24899 arg "newline-insert newline"
24902 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24910 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24911 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24912 A new row is created by every further entry of
24915 arg "newline-insert newline"
24919 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24920 Here is an example:
24921 \begin_inset Formula
24923 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24924 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24929 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24930 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24931 \begin_inset Formula
24933 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24941 \begin_layout Standard
24942 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24949 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24950 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24953 reference "eq:asquared"
24958 The other types are described in section
24959 \begin_inset space ~
24963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24965 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24972 \begin_layout Section
24973 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24974 \begin_inset Index idx
24977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24978 Math ! Formula numbering
24984 \begin_inset Index idx
24987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24988 Math ! Referencing formulas
24994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24996 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25003 \begin_layout Standard
25004 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25006 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25007 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25009 \begin_inset space ~
25013 \begin_inset space ~
25021 arg "math-number-toggle"
25025 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25026 within parentheses.
25027 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25028 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25029 the document class.
25030 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25031 separated by a dot:
25032 \begin_inset Formula
25042 arg "math-number-toggle"
25045 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25046 You can only number displayed formulas.
25049 \begin_layout Standard
25050 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25052 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25053 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25055 \begin_inset space ~
25059 \begin_inset space ~
25067 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25070 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25071 \begin_inset Formula
25074 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25080 To number all lines use the shortcut
25083 arg "math-number-toggle"
25089 \begin_layout Standard
25090 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25093 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25094 A label is inserted with the menu
25096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25105 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25106 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25107 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25119 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25120 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25121 We inserted in the following example the label
25122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25129 in the second line:
25130 \begin_inset Formula
25132 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25133 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25138 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25139 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25140 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25144 \begin_inset space ~
25152 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25156 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25157 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25158 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25159 as the formula number:
25162 \begin_layout Standard
25163 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25166 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25173 \begin_layout Standard
25174 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25175 's cross-reference box are described in section
25176 \begin_inset space ~
25180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25182 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25187 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25195 \begin_layout Section
25196 User defined math macros
25197 \begin_inset Index idx
25200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25209 \begin_layout Standard
25211 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25212 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25213 Math macros are explained in section
25216 \begin_inset space ~
25228 \begin_layout Section
25232 \begin_layout Subsection
25234 \begin_inset Index idx
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25246 \begin_layout Standard
25247 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25248 To set a font in a formula, use the
25251 \begin_inset space ~
25259 arg "math-insert \\font"
25262 , or enter its command, listed in table
25263 \begin_inset space ~
25267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25269 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25276 \begin_layout Standard
25277 \begin_inset Float table
25282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25283 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25288 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25292 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25302 \begin_inset Tabular
25303 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25304 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25305 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25306 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25365 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25425 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25452 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25479 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25513 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25540 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25574 \begin_layout Standard
25575 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25583 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25599 \begin_layout Standard
25600 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25601 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25606 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25607 space when you need a space in the box.
25608 Here is an example where
25609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25620 denotes the set of numbers:
25621 \begin_inset Formula
25623 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25631 \begin_layout Standard
25632 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25633 You can, for example, put a character in
25642 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25646 \begin_inset Newline newline
25649 So it is better not to use this feature.
25652 \begin_layout Standard
25653 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25654 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25658 \begin_inset Newline newline
25661 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25667 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25668 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25674 \begin_layout Standard
25681 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25684 \begin_layout Standard
25685 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25687 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25688 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25690 \begin_inset space ~
25698 \begin_layout Subsection
25700 \begin_inset Index idx
25703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25712 \begin_layout Standard
25713 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25715 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25719 \begin_inset space ~
25723 \begin_inset space ~
25731 \begin_inset space ~
25739 arg "math-insert \\font"
25743 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25744 in black instead of blue.
25745 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25746 Here is an example:
25747 \begin_inset Formula
25750 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25751 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25760 \begin_layout Subsection
25762 \begin_inset Index idx
25765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25774 \begin_layout Standard
25775 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25776 automatically chosen in most situations.
25794 For most characters,
25802 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25803 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25808 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25809 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25810 thinks are appropriate.
25811 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25814 arg "math-insert \\style"
25818 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25819 For example, you can set
25820 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25823 , which is normally in
25832 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25836 The four styles are used in the following example:
25839 \begin_layout Standard
25840 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25844 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25848 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25852 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25858 \begin_layout Standard
25859 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25860 is set in a particular size with the menu
25862 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25864 \begin_inset space ~
25869 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25870 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25871 will be adjusted to correspond.
25872 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25883 \begin_layout Standard
25887 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25893 \begin_layout Section
25894 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25896 \begin_inset Index idx
25899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25906 \begin_inset Index idx
25909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25918 \begin_layout Standard
25920 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25921 that are in common use.
25924 \begin_layout Subsection
25925 Enabling AMS-Support
25928 \begin_layout Standard
25929 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25930 the document by selecting the checkbox
25933 \begin_inset space ~
25937 \begin_inset space ~
25941 \begin_inset space ~
25948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25952 \begin_inset Index idx
25955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25956 Document ! Settings
25964 \begin_inset space ~
25970 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25971 -errors in formulas,
25972 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25975 \begin_layout Subsection
25977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25979 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25984 \begin_inset Index idx
25987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25988 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25996 \begin_layout Standard
25997 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25998 provides a selection of different formula types.
26000 allows you to choose between
26021 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26022 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26028 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26031 \begin_layout Chapter
26035 \begin_layout Section
26037 \begin_inset Index idx
26040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26049 name "sec:Cross-References"
26056 \begin_layout Standard
26057 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26058 's strengths is cross-references.
26059 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26061 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26062 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26063 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26066 \begin_layout Enumerate
26070 \begin_layout Enumerate
26071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26073 name "enu:Second-item"
26080 \begin_layout Enumerate
26084 \begin_layout Standard
26085 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26090 or by pressing the toolbar button
26097 A gray label box like this:
26098 \begin_inset Graphics
26099 filename clipart/label.png
26103 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26105 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26140 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26141 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26157 \begin_layout Standard
26158 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26163 or the toolbar button
26166 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26170 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26171 \begin_inset Graphics
26172 filename clipart/reference.png
26176 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26178 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26191 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26195 \begin_layout Standard
26196 As an alternative to
26198 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26201 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26206 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26207 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26209 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26221 \begin_layout Standard
26222 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26223 \begin_inset space ~
26227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26229 reference "enu:Second-item"
26236 \begin_layout Standard
26237 It is recommended to use a protected space
26241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26242 described in section
26243 \begin_inset space ~
26247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26249 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26258 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26259 line breaks between them.
26262 \begin_layout Standard
26263 There are six formats of cross-references:
26266 \begin_layout Description
26267 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26270 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26277 \begin_layout Description
26278 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26279 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26291 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26298 \begin_layout Description
26299 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26300 \begin_inset space ~
26304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26305 LatexCommand pageref
26306 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26313 \begin_layout Description
26315 \begin_inset space ~
26319 \begin_inset space ~
26322 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26324 LatexCommand vpageref
26325 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26330 \begin_inset Newline newline
26333 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26334 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26335 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26336 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26337 it prints “on the next page”.
26338 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26341 \begin_layout Description
26343 \begin_inset space ~
26347 \begin_inset space ~
26351 \begin_inset space ~
26354 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26357 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26362 \begin_inset Newline newline
26365 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26371 ; otherwise it behaves like
26375 \begin_inset space ~
26379 \begin_inset space ~
26388 \begin_layout Description
26390 \begin_inset space ~
26393 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26394 \begin_inset Newline newline
26398 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26406 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26416 \begin_inset Index idx
26419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26421 -packages ! prettyref
26427 \begin_inset Index idx
26430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26432 -packages ! refstyle
26443 \begin_inset Newline newline
26446 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26447 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26450 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26454 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26455 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26463 is the default and preferred because
26467 supports only English documents.
26468 The format is specified by using the command
26480 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26481 preamble of the document.
26482 For example, if you are using
26486 , then redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
26488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26499 ) can be done with this command
26500 \begin_inset Newline newline
26507 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26512 \begin_inset Newline newline
26515 Please note that neither
26523 (nor LyX itself) defines reference formats for all available types.
26524 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
26526 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
26527 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
26532 , you might do so as follows:
26533 \begin_inset Newline newline
26540 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
26545 \begin_inset Newline newline
26548 For more information about the defining formatted references, have a look
26549 at the package documentations,
26550 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26552 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26559 \begin_layout Description
26561 \begin_inset space ~
26564 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26566 LatexCommand nameref
26567 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26574 \begin_layout Standard
26575 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26576 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26578 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26582 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26586 \begin_layout Standard
26587 You can only use the style
26591 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26595 is always possible.
26598 \begin_layout Standard
26599 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26600 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26602 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26603 \begin_inset space ~
26607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26609 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26616 \begin_layout Standard
26617 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26621 \begin_inset space ~
26625 \begin_inset space ~
26630 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26631 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26634 \begin_inset space ~
26639 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26640 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26643 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26649 \begin_layout Standard
26650 You can change labels at any time.
26651 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26652 do not need to think about this.
26655 \begin_layout Standard
26656 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26658 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26662 \begin_layout Standard
26663 References are described in detail in the section
26664 \begin_inset space ~
26674 \begin_inset space ~
26682 \begin_layout Section
26683 Table of Contents and other Listings
26684 \begin_inset Index idx
26687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26694 \begin_inset Index idx
26697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26698 Navigating ! Outline
26704 \begin_inset Index idx
26707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26723 \begin_layout Subsection
26725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26727 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26734 \begin_layout Standard
26735 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26738 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26740 \begin_inset space ~
26744 \begin_inset space ~
26750 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26752 If you click on it, the
26756 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26757 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26758 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26760 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26762 \begin_inset space ~
26767 that is described in section
26768 \begin_inset space ~
26772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26774 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26781 \begin_layout Standard
26782 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26783 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26785 \begin_inset space ~
26789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26791 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26795 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26797 \begin_inset space ~
26801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26803 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26807 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26809 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26812 \begin_layout Subsection
26813 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26816 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26823 \begin_layout Standard
26824 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26826 You can insert them via the
26828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26832 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26835 \begin_layout Section
26836 URLs and Hyperlinks
26837 \begin_inset Index idx
26840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26847 \begin_inset Index idx
26850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26859 \begin_layout Subsection
26861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26870 \begin_layout Standard
26871 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26879 \begin_layout Standard
26880 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26882 \begin_inset Flex URL
26885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26895 \begin_layout Standard
26896 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26902 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26906 \begin_layout Standard
26907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26915 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26924 \begin_layout Subsection
26926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26928 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26935 \begin_layout Standard
26936 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26938 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26941 or with the toolbar button
26948 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26957 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26958 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26959 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26961 name "LyX's homepage"
26962 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26966 , an Email address like this:
26967 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26969 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26970 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26975 , or a link to a file.
26978 \begin_layout Standard
26979 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26992 to the link target.
26995 \begin_layout Standard
26996 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26997 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26998 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26999 the text style dialog.
27000 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27004 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27006 name "LyX's homepage"
27007 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27014 \begin_layout Standard
27015 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27019 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27022 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27026 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27028 \begin_inset Newline newline
27036 \begin_inset Newline newline
27043 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27046 \begin_layout Section
27048 \begin_inset Index idx
27051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27060 name "sec:Appendices"
27067 \begin_layout Standard
27068 Appendices are created with the menu
27070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27072 \begin_inset space ~
27076 \begin_inset space ~
27082 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27083 as the appendix part of the book.
27084 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27087 \begin_layout Standard
27088 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27089 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27090 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27091 and the subsection number.
27092 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27096 \begin_layout Standard
27098 \begin_inset space ~
27102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27104 reference "chap:Credits"
27109 \begin_inset space ~
27113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27115 reference "subsec:Export"
27122 \begin_layout Section
27124 \begin_inset Index idx
27127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27136 name "sec:Bibliography"
27143 \begin_layout Standard
27144 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27146 You can include a bibliography database,
27150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27151 Known under the name
27152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27155 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27165 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27166 manually, using the paragraph environment
27170 , which was described in section
27171 \begin_inset space ~
27175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27177 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27182 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27183 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27187 use a bibliography database.
27190 \begin_layout Subsection
27191 The Bibliography Environment
27194 \begin_layout Standard
27199 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27201 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27210 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27212 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27222 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27225 \begin_layout Standard
27226 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27231 or the toolbar button
27234 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27238 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27239 containing the available citations.
27240 Select one or more keys from the list and
27250 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27251 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27255 \begin_layout Standard
27256 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27257 entry with surrounding brackets.
27262 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27263 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27275 \begin_layout Standard
27279 Companion Second Edition
27282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27284 key "latexcompanion"
27291 \begin_layout Standard
27292 The \SpecialChar LyX
27293 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27294 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27303 \begin_layout Standard
27304 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27307 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27309 \begin_inset space ~
27317 arg "layout-paragraph"
27321 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27324 \begin_layout Subsection
27325 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27327 \begin_inset Index idx
27330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27331 Bibliography ! Databases
27337 \begin_inset Index idx
27340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27341 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27350 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27357 \begin_layout Standard
27358 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27364 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27366 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27367 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27372 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27374 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27375 your working field in a database.
27376 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27377 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27378 list for that document.
27379 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27383 \begin_layout Standard
27384 The database is a text file with the file extension
27385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27396 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27397 The format is explained in
27398 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27404 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27406 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27408 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27413 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27414 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27415 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27417 \begin_inset Flex URL
27420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27422 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27430 \begin_layout Standard
27431 To use a database, use the menu
27433 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27438 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27440 \begin_inset space ~
27446 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27447 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27454 Add bibliography to TOC
27456 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27461 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27462 in the document or just the cited references.
27465 \begin_layout Standard
27466 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27478 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27479 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27480 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27481 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27483 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27489 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27490 \begin_inset Newline newline
27494 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27496 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27508 \begin_layout Standard
27509 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27512 \begin_layout Standard
27513 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27514 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27516 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27529 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27530 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27531 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27535 The following variants are possible:
27538 \begin_layout Description
27539 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27540 with other bibliography packages (e.
27541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27545 \begin_inset space \space{}
27552 ), only with the package
27556 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27560 \begin_layout Description
27561 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27562 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27563 with all bibliography packages, except
27568 \begin_layout Description
27569 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27574 , works with all bibliography packages
27577 \begin_layout Standard
27578 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27579 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27581 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27584 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27597 \begin_layout Standard
27598 When you select the option
27600 Sectioned bibliography
27604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27605 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27608 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27609 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27611 Customizing Bibliographies
27615 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27620 Additional Features
27625 \begin_layout Standard
27626 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27627 the two methods of creating them.
27628 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27629 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27630 We used the style file
27634 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27637 \begin_layout Subsection
27639 \begin_inset Index idx
27642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27643 Bibliography ! Citation format
27651 \begin_layout Standard
27652 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27653 For this feature you need to enable the option
27659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27663 \begin_inset Index idx
27666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27667 Document ! Settings
27677 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27678 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27679 style files as explained in
27680 the previous section.
27683 \begin_layout Standard
27684 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27685 the citation reference window.
27686 Here is an example where the text
27687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27691 \begin_inset space ~
27695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27698 appears after the reference:
27701 \begin_layout Standard
27703 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27706 key "latexcompanion"
27713 \begin_layout Section
27715 \begin_inset Index idx
27718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27734 \begin_layout Standard
27735 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27739 \begin_inset space ~
27744 or the toolbar button
27751 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27752 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27753 by \SpecialChar LyX
27754 as the index entry.
27757 \begin_layout Standard
27758 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27760 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27761 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27763 \begin_inset space ~
27769 A light blue box labeled
27770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27781 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27782 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27786 \begin_layout Standard
27787 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27788 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27789 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27790 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27792 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27794 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27801 \begin_layout Subsection
27802 Grouping Index Entries
27803 \begin_inset Index idx
27806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27815 \begin_layout Standard
27816 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27818 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27819 lists under the entry
27820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27828 First we create the entry
27829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27837 \begin_inset space ~
27841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27843 reference "subsec:Lists"
27848 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27849 \begin_inset space ~
27853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27855 reference "sec:Itemize"
27859 , we insert the command
27862 \begin_layout Standard
27868 \begin_layout Standard
27872 \begin_layout Standard
27878 \begin_layout Standard
27879 for the enumerated list in section
27880 \begin_inset space ~
27884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27886 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27893 \begin_layout Standard
27894 The exclamation mark
27895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27902 marks the grouping levels.
27903 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27904 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27905 If we don't have an index entry for
27906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27913 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27916 \begin_layout Subsection
27918 \begin_inset Index idx
27921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27922 Index ! Page ranges
27930 \begin_layout Standard
27931 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27933 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27934 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27935 an index entry in section
27936 \begin_inset space ~
27940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27942 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27949 \begin_layout Standard
27952 Paragraph environments|(
27955 \begin_layout Standard
27956 and another entry at the end of section
27957 \begin_inset space ~
27961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27963 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27970 \begin_layout Standard
27973 Paragraph environments|)
27976 \begin_layout Standard
27978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28001 respectively start and end the index range.
28002 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28003 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28004 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28005 An example is the index entry
28006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28009 Document ! Settings
28010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28016 \begin_layout Subsection
28018 \begin_inset Index idx
28021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28022 Index ! Cross referencing
28030 \begin_layout Standard
28031 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28032 We referred for example in the index entry
28033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28041 \begin_inset space ~
28045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28047 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28051 ) to the index entry
28052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28059 in the same section using the entry
28062 \begin_layout Standard
28065 GIF|see{Image formats}
28068 \begin_layout Standard
28069 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28071 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28072 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28075 \begin_layout Subsection
28077 \begin_inset Index idx
28080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28081 Index ! Entry order
28089 \begin_layout Standard
28090 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28091 follow the rules for the index order.
28092 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28098 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28100 \begin_inset space ~
28104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28106 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28115 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28116 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28141 \begin_inset Index idx
28144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28145 Dummy entries ! maïs
28151 \begin_inset Index idx
28154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28155 Dummy entries ! maître
28161 \begin_inset Index idx
28164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28165 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28170 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28171 maïs, maison, maître.
28172 To achieve this, we use the command
28175 \begin_layout Standard
28178 previous entry@current entry
28181 \begin_layout Standard
28182 In our case we want to have
28183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28198 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28201 \begin_layout Standard
28207 \begin_layout Standard
28208 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28209 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28211 See the next subsection for an example.
28214 \begin_layout Standard
28215 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28221 \begin_layout Standard
28222 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28227 to generate the index (see section
28228 \begin_inset space ~
28232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28234 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28243 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28244 -package aeguill in section
28245 \begin_inset space ~
28249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28251 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28255 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28256 -packages although all these index
28257 commands start with
28258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28271 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28276 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28279 \begin_layout Standard
28291 \begin_layout Standard
28303 \begin_layout Subsection
28305 \begin_inset Index idx
28308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28309 Index ! Entry layout
28317 \begin_layout Standard
28318 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28319 \begin_inset Index idx
28322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28325 This is an italic dummy entry
28330 You can also format the page number using the character
28331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28338 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28339 -command without a backslash.
28340 We can write for example
28343 \begin_layout Standard
28346 italic page number:|textit
28349 \begin_layout Standard
28350 to get the page number in italic.
28351 \begin_inset Index idx
28354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28355 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28360 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28361 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28379 \begin_inset space ~
28385 Have a look at section
28386 \begin_inset space ~
28390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28392 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28396 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28400 \begin_layout Standard
28401 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28409 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28413 to generate the index, see section
28414 \begin_inset space ~
28418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28420 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28429 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28434 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28435 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28438 key "latexcompanion"
28450 \begin_layout Standard
28451 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28453 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28454 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28455 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28456 If so, put the following in the preamble
28459 \begin_layout Standard
28471 \begin_layout Standard
28475 \begin_layout Standard
28481 \begin_layout Standard
28482 in the index entry.
28483 \begin_inset Index idx
28486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28487 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28492 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28493 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28494 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28497 \begin_layout Standard
28498 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28499 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28500 a bold font for all index entries.
28501 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28513 documentation for details,
28514 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28516 key "makeindex,xindy"
28523 \begin_layout Subsection
28525 \begin_inset Index idx
28528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28537 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28544 \begin_layout Standard
28545 If the index generation program
28549 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28550 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28554 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28555 distribution, is used.
28559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28564 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28565 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28566 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28567 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28568 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28578 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28580 dialog, see section
28581 \begin_inset space ~
28585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28587 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28592 The available options are listed and explained in
28593 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28595 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28600 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28604 \begin_layout Standard
28605 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28606 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28609 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28610 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28614 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28615 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28618 \begin_layout Subsection
28622 \begin_layout Standard
28623 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28624 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28632 next to the standard index.
28634 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28635 that add this feature.
28642 \begin_inset Index idx
28645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28647 -packages ! splitidx
28652 package to generate multiple indexes.
28653 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28659 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28661 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28668 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28669 style, but it also includes
28670 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28671 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28679 \begin_layout Standard
28680 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28681 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28684 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28687 and select the option
28689 Use multiple Indexes
28696 already contains the standard index
28697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28705 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28706 also appear as a heading) to the
28710 input field and press the
28715 The new index now also appears in the list.
28716 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28717 label color to the new index.
28720 \begin_layout Standard
28721 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28731 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28732 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28733 are additional features:
28736 \begin_layout Itemize
28737 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28738 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28741 \begin_layout Itemize
28742 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28743 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28751 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28752 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28753 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28754 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28757 \begin_layout Section
28758 Nomenclature/Glossary
28759 \begin_inset Index idx
28762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28769 \begin_inset Index idx
28772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28803 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28810 \begin_layout Standard
28811 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28812 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28813 called nomenclature or glossary.
28816 \begin_layout Standard
28817 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28824 \begin_inset Index idx
28827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28829 -packages ! nomencl
28835 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28837 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28843 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28847 \begin_layout Standard
28848 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28849 and then use the menu
28851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28857 \begin_inset space ~
28862 or the toolbar button
28865 arg "nomencl-insert"
28870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28881 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28884 \begin_layout Standard
28885 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28886 The first is the term or
28890 that you wish to define.
28895 of the term or symbol.
28898 \begin_layout Standard
28899 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28907 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28908 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28916 \begin_layout Subsection
28917 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28918 \begin_inset Index idx
28921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28922 Nomenclature ! Layout
28930 \begin_layout Standard
28931 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28935 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28942 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28950 \begin_inset Newline newline
28958 \begin_inset Newline newline
28964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28971 character starts/ends the formula.
28972 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28973 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28985 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28995 \begin_layout Standard
28996 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28997 -syntax is given in section
28998 \begin_inset space ~
29002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29004 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29011 \begin_layout Standard
29015 \begin_inset space ~
29020 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29022 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29027 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29034 in this document is:
29035 \begin_inset Newline newline
29040 dummy entry for the character
29045 \begin_inset Newline newline
29057 \begin_inset space ~
29067 font use the command
29096 \begin_layout Standard
29097 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29102 \begin_inset space \space{}
29106 \begin_inset Newline newline
29122 \begin_inset Newline newline
29125 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29126 This command will make the font of all symbols
29133 \begin_inset space ~
29141 \begin_layout Standard
29142 If the characters |
29143 \begin_inset space \space{}
29147 \begin_inset space \space{}
29151 \begin_inset space \space{}
29155 \begin_inset space \space{}
29159 \begin_inset space \space{}
29162 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29163 a quote character in front of them.
29164 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29165 LatexCommand nomenclature
29166 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29167 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29174 \begin_layout Subsection
29175 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29176 \begin_inset Index idx
29179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29180 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29188 \begin_layout Standard
29189 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29190 -code of the symbol
29192 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29194 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29197 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29198 LatexCommand nomenclature
29200 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29207 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29211 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29212 LatexCommand nomenclature
29215 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29220 They will be sorted by
29221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29247 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29250 will be sorted before the
29254 since the character
29255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29262 is considered in sorting.
29265 \begin_layout Standard
29266 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29269 \begin_inset space ~
29274 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29275 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29277 For the example given, you can insert
29281 in this field for the
29282 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29289 will be located before
29290 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29296 \begin_layout Standard
29297 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29302 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29311 \begin_layout Subsection
29312 Nomenclature Options
29313 \begin_inset Index idx
29316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29317 Nomenclature ! Options
29325 \begin_layout Standard
29330 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29331 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29334 \begin_layout Description
29335 refeq Appends the phrase
29336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29351 to every nomenclature entry, where
29357 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29360 \begin_layout Description
29361 refpage Appends the phrase
29362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29377 to every nomenclature entry, where
29383 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29386 \begin_layout Description
29387 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29390 \begin_layout Standard
29391 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29392 class options list in the
29394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29398 In this document the options
29405 \begin_layout Standard
29406 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29412 \begin_layout Standard
29413 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29414 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29419 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29422 \begin_layout Description
29432 \begin_layout Description
29435 nomrefpage Like the
29442 \begin_layout Description
29445 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29454 \begin_layout Description
29458 \begin_inset space ~
29464 \begin_inset space ~
29469 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29472 \begin_layout Standard
29474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29481 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29482 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29486 \begin_layout Standard
29494 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29497 \begin_inset Newline newline
29504 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29509 \begin_inset Newline newline
29513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29528 by their translation.
29531 \begin_layout Subsection
29532 Printing the Nomenclature
29533 \begin_inset Index idx
29536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29537 Nomenclature ! Printing
29545 \begin_layout Standard
29546 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29549 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29565 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29566 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29567 You can choose between these settings:
29570 \begin_layout Description
29571 Default a space of 1
29572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29578 \begin_layout Description
29580 \begin_inset space ~
29584 \begin_inset space ~
29587 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29590 \begin_layout Description
29591 Custom custom space
29594 \begin_layout Standard
29595 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29604 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29612 For example, in order to change the name to
29616 , add the following line to the preamble:
29619 \begin_layout Standard
29627 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29630 \begin_layout Subsection
29631 Nomenclature Program
29632 \begin_inset Index idx
29635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29636 Nomenclature ! Program
29642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29644 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29651 \begin_layout Standard
29657 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29658 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29660 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29665 by adding options, see section
29666 \begin_inset space ~
29670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29672 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29677 The available options are listed and explained in
29678 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29680 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29687 \begin_layout Section
29689 \begin_inset Index idx
29692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29699 \begin_inset Index idx
29702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29703 Document ! Branches
29709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29711 name "sec:Branches"
29718 \begin_layout Standard
29719 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29720 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29721 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29722 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29725 \begin_layout Standard
29726 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29727 allows you to put text into branches.
29728 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29729 To create a branch, either select the menu
29731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29732 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29735 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29744 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29745 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29746 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29747 and whether the name of the branch should
29748 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29749 (see below for an example).
29750 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29751 to the name of the other) and to add
29752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29764 \begin_inset space ~
29767 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29768 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29771 \begin_layout Standard
29772 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29773 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29778 where you can choose a branch.
29779 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29783 \begin_layout Standard
29784 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29785 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29788 \begin_layout Standard
29789 \begin_inset Branch Question
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29793 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29801 \begin_layout Standard
29802 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29805 \begin_layout Standard
29806 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29822 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29825 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29826 Consider for example a file
29827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29834 which has the above branches.
29836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29843 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29867 branch were inactive,
29868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29883 branch was active, likewise
29884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29899 branch was active, and
29900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29903 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29907 if both branches were active.
29908 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29911 \begin_layout Standard
29912 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29918 \begin_layout Standard
29919 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29920 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29921 definitions for each branch.
29922 For example you can define for the question branch
29926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29927 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29928 -syntax, see section
29929 \begin_inset space ~
29933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29935 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29947 \begin_layout Standard
29957 \begin_layout Standard
29967 \begin_layout Standard
29968 and for the answer branch
29971 \begin_layout Standard
29981 \begin_layout Standard
29991 \begin_layout Standard
29992 \begin_inset Branch Question
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30027 \begin_layout Standard
30028 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30031 \begin_layout Standard
30035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30063 \begin_layout Standard
30064 Now it is possible to use the
30068 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30075 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30078 commands to obtain conditional output.
30079 Here is an example formula where only the
30086 \begin_inset Formula
30088 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30096 \begin_layout Standard
30097 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30105 \begin_layout Standard
30106 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30112 \begin_inset space \space{}
30115 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30117 For this advanced usage, see the
30123 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30128 \begin_layout Section
30130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30132 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30137 \begin_inset Index idx
30140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30149 \begin_layout Standard
30152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30153 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30156 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30158 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30164 \begin_inset Index idx
30167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30169 -packages ! hyperref
30174 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30175 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30176 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30177 part of the document.
30181 \begin_layout Standard
30182 The header information in the dialog tab
30186 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30187 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30188 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30189 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30193 \begin_inset space ~
30197 \begin_inset space ~
30202 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30203 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30204 and author entries.
30208 \begin_inset space ~
30212 \begin_inset space ~
30216 \begin_inset space ~
30221 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30224 \begin_layout Standard
30225 You can specify in the dialog tab
30229 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30234 \begin_inset space ~
30238 \begin_inset space ~
30242 \begin_inset space ~
30247 option allows long links to be split;
30250 \begin_inset space ~
30254 \begin_inset space ~
30258 \begin_inset space ~
30266 \begin_inset space ~
30271 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30274 \begin_inset space ~
30279 colors the different links.
30280 The default colors are:
30283 \begin_layout Labeling
30284 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30289 for hyperlinks and URLs
30292 \begin_layout Labeling
30293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30301 \begin_layout Labeling
30302 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30310 \begin_layout Standard
30311 but you can change these in the field
30316 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30319 \begin_layout Standard
30322 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30325 \begin_layout Standard
30330 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30331 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30332 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30335 \begin_layout Standard
30340 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30341 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30342 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30352 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30353 when opening the PDF.
30355 \begin_inset space ~
30358 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30359 \begin_inset space ~
30362 1 will only display the sections.
30365 \begin_layout Standard
30366 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30367 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30373 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30374 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30383 \begin_layout Section
30385 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30389 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30396 \begin_layout Subsection
30399 \begin_inset Index idx
30402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30412 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30419 \begin_layout Standard
30420 As \SpecialChar LyX
30421 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30422 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30423 commands and constructs,
30426 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30427 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30428 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30429 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30430 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30431 cannot support all packages and
30435 \begin_layout Standard
30436 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30437 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30438 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30442 Code box is created by the menu
30444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30446 \begin_inset space ~
30451 or by the toolbar button
30464 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30472 \begin_layout Standard
30473 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30475 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30477 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30478 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30485 , you can write the command part
30491 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30492 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30496 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30497 Code box behind the word.
30498 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30499 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30503 \begin_layout Standard
30504 \begin_inset Graphics
30505 filename clipart/ERT.png
30513 \begin_layout Standard
30517 \begin_layout Standard
30518 This is a line with a
30522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30545 \begin_layout Standard
30546 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30554 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30555 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30556 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30557 know that the command is finished.
30565 \begin_layout Subsection
30566 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30568 \begin_inset Argument 1
30571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30572 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30579 \begin_inset Index idx
30582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30592 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30599 \begin_layout Standard
30600 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30601 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30602 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30603 uses in the background.
30604 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30605 is based on commands, you can
30606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30614 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30615 any time if you know the right commands.
30616 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30617 is the end of the day.
30618 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30619 all caption labels bold.
30620 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30622 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30626 \begin_layout Standard
30627 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30629 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30631 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30634 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30643 \begin_layout Standard
30644 As result you find that the package
30649 \begin_inset Index idx
30652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30654 -packages ! caption
30660 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30665 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30669 \begin_inset space ~
30677 \begin_layout Standard
30682 usepackage[options]{package name}
30685 \begin_layout Standard
30686 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30687 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30688 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30689 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30692 \begin_layout Standard
30693 In your case the package name is
30698 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30703 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30704 So you add the command
30707 \begin_layout Standard
30712 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30715 \begin_layout Standard
30716 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30721 For more commands provided by the
30725 package, have a look at its documentation,
30726 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30741 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30743 For example if you use a
30747 class, you don't need the package
30751 , you can instead write
30754 \begin_layout Standard
30759 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30764 \begin_layout Standard
30765 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30766 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30767 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30774 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30777 \begin_layout Standard
30778 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30779 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30781 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30782 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30783 Code box as described in the previous
30787 \begin_layout Standard
30788 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30789 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30792 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30794 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30801 \begin_layout Standard
30802 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30808 \begin_layout Standard
30812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30822 \begin_inset Note Note
30825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30826 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30834 \begin_layout Left Header
30835 \begin_inset Argument 1
30838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30858 \begin_inset Note Note
30861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30862 defines the header line as described below
30870 \begin_layout Center Header
30871 \begin_inset Argument 1
30874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30883 \begin_layout Right Header
30884 \begin_inset Argument 1
30887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30908 \begin_layout Left Footer
30909 \begin_inset Argument 1
30912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30933 \begin_layout Center Footer
30934 \begin_inset Argument 1
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30949 \begin_inset Newline newline
30953 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30959 \begin_layout Right Footer
30960 \begin_inset Argument 1
30963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30985 \begin_layout Section
30986 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30989 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30994 \begin_inset Index idx
30997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30998 Document ! Header/Footer line
31004 \begin_inset Index idx
31007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 \begin_layout Standard
31017 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31021 \begin_inset space ~
31032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31038 \begin_inset space ~
31044 As a second step add in the menu
31046 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31047 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31056 Custom Header/Footerlines
31059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31063 This module offers the following 6
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31070 \begin_layout Description
31072 \begin_inset space ~
31076 \begin_inset space ~
31080 \begin_inset space ~
31084 \begin_inset space ~
31088 \begin_inset space ~
31094 \begin_layout Description
31096 \begin_inset space ~
31100 \begin_inset space ~
31104 \begin_inset space ~
31108 \begin_inset space ~
31112 \begin_inset space ~
31118 \begin_layout Standard
31119 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31120 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
31123 \begin_layout Standard
31124 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31125 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31127 \begin_inset space ~
31131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31133 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31137 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31140 \begin_layout Standard
31141 \begin_inset Float figure
31147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31150 \begin_inset Tabular
31151 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31152 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31153 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31155 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31157 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31175 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31186 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31204 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31215 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31219 The normal text on the page goes here.
31220 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31222 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31223 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
31228 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31237 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31248 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31266 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31277 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31295 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31313 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31318 name "fig:Page-layout"
31322 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31335 \begin_layout Standard
31336 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31344 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31348 \begin_inset space ~
31353 is set to “Default”.
31354 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31363 \begin_layout Subsection
31367 \begin_layout Standard
31368 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
31369 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
31370 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31371 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31373 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
31375 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31378 \begin_layout Standard
31379 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31380 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31384 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31386 \begin_inset space ~
31394 \begin_layout Description
31397 thepage prints the current page number
31400 \begin_layout Description
31403 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31406 \begin_layout Description
31409 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31412 \begin_layout Description
31415 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31416 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31423 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31426 because it usually goes in a left header.
31429 \begin_layout Description
31432 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31433 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31435 It is normally used in the right header.
31438 \begin_layout Subsection
31439 Default header/footer
31442 \begin_layout Standard
31443 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31444 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31445 footer has the page number.
31446 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31447 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31448 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31451 \begin_inset space ~
31459 \begin_layout Subsection
31463 \begin_layout Standard
31464 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31465 Some pages are different.
31466 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
31467 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
31468 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31469 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31470 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31474 Header and footer decoration line
31477 \begin_layout Standard
31478 By default, you get a 0.4
31479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31482 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31483 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31495 in the following way:
31498 \begin_layout Standard
31505 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31508 \begin_layout Standard
31509 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31522 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31529 \begin_layout Standard
31530 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31532 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31533 \begin_inset space ~
31537 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31547 Several header/footer lines
31550 \begin_layout Standard
31551 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31552 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
31553 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
31555 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31570 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31571 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31573 \begin_inset space ~
31581 \begin_layout Standard
31588 headheight}{height}
31591 \begin_layout Standard
31596 is a size in standard units (e.
31597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31601 \begin_inset space \space{}
31609 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
31610 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31611 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31612 logfile with the menu
31614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31616 \begin_inset space ~
31624 \begin_inset space ~
31629 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31634 \begin_inset Index idx
31637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31639 -packages ! fancyhdr
31645 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31646 for your header/footer.
31649 \begin_layout Subsection
31653 \begin_layout Standard
31654 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31655 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31656 This example consists of the following definition:
31659 \begin_layout Description
31661 \begin_inset space ~
31670 , empty optional argument
31673 \begin_layout Description
31675 \begin_inset space ~
31678 Header empty, empty optional argument
31681 \begin_layout Description
31683 \begin_inset space ~
31692 in the optional argument
31695 \begin_layout Description
31697 \begin_inset space ~
31706 in the optional argument
31709 \begin_layout Description
31711 \begin_inset space ~
31724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31728 \begin_inset Newline newline
31732 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31739 in the optional argument
31742 \begin_layout Description
31744 \begin_inset space ~
31753 , empty optional argument
31756 \begin_layout Description
31759 headrulewidth set to 2
31760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31766 \begin_layout Standard
31767 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31768 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31774 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31783 \begin_layout Standard
31784 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31790 \begin_layout Standard
31794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31798 pagestyle{headings}
31804 \begin_inset Note Note
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31808 switches back to page style with the default headings
31816 \begin_layout Section
31817 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31820 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31825 \begin_inset Index idx
31828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31835 \begin_inset Index idx
31838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31847 \begin_layout Standard
31849 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31850 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31851 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31854 \begin_layout Subsection
31858 \begin_layout Standard
31859 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31865 \begin_inset Index idx
31868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31870 -packages ! preview-latex
31875 (on some systems named simply
31880 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31882 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31888 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31890 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31898 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31899 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31900 -package are automatically
31901 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31905 \begin_layout Subsection
31909 \begin_layout Standard
31910 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31911 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31913 activate the option
31916 \begin_inset space ~
31923 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31929 \begin_inset space ~
31933 \begin_inset space ~
31936 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31943 \begin_inset space ~
31956 \begin_inset space ~
31961 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31964 \begin_layout Standard
31965 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31970 \begin_inset space ~
31978 \begin_inset space ~
31986 \begin_layout Standard
31987 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31988 and when you finish
31992 \begin_layout Standard
31993 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32001 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32002 generated by activating the option
32005 \begin_inset space ~
32011 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32019 \begin_layout Subsection
32020 Selected document parts
32023 \begin_layout Standard
32024 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32025 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32026 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32027 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32029 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32035 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32036 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32037 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32040 \begin_layout Standard
32041 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32048 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32060 is explained in section
32062 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32077 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32078 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32079 the final rotated boxes,
32080 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32081 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32083 Here is the result:
32086 \begin_layout Standard
32087 \begin_inset Preview
32089 \begin_layout Standard
32094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32098 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32104 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32114 height_special "totalheight"
32119 backgroundcolor "none"
32122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32147 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32153 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32175 \begin_layout Standard
32176 Previewing works also for colors.
32177 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32196 is explained in section
32203 \begin_inset space ~
32216 \begin_layout Standard
32217 \begin_inset Preview
32219 \begin_layout Standard
32223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32242 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32247 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32266 \begin_layout Standard
32267 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32273 \begin_layout Standard
32274 If \SpecialChar LyX
32275 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32276 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32277 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32278 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32279 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32280 the \SpecialChar TeX
32282 If \SpecialChar LyX
32283 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32284 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32286 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32287 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32288 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32291 \begin_layout Subsection
32296 \begin_layout Standard
32297 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32298 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32301 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32303 \begin_inset space ~
32308 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32310 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32312 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32313 's main window, then only this selection
32314 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32315 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32316 the source view window.
32321 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32322 ; but note that if you have
32323 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32325 not just the one which is open at the time.
32328 \begin_layout Section
32329 Advanced Find and Replace
32330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32332 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32337 \begin_inset Index idx
32340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32347 \begin_inset Index idx
32350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32359 \begin_layout Subsection
32363 \begin_layout Standard
32364 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32365 allows for searching of complex,
32366 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32368 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32369 The key-features are:
32372 \begin_layout Itemize
32373 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32374 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32375 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32379 \begin_layout Itemize
32380 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32381 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32382 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32383 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32386 \begin_layout Itemize
32387 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32388 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32389 outside of mathematics environments
32392 \begin_layout Itemize
32393 Search may be widened to a specific
32398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32402 \begin_inset space ~
32405 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32406 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32413 \begin_layout Itemize
32414 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32415 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32420 \begin_inset space ~
32423 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32426 \begin_layout Subsection
32430 \begin_layout Standard
32431 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32446 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32449 ) or the toolbar button
32452 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32458 Advanced Find and Replace
32463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32467 \begin_layout Standard
32473 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32477 \begin_inset space ~
32482 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32485 arg "paragraph-break"
32489 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32490 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32494 arg "paragraph-break"
32497 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32501 searches backwards.
32504 \begin_layout Standard
32508 \begin_inset space ~
32513 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32522 \begin_inset space ~
32527 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32531 Searching for mathematics
32534 \begin_layout Standard
32535 Mathematical formulas, such as
32536 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32539 or something more complex like
32540 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32543 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32548 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32549 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32550 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32551 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32561 \begin_layout Standard
32562 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32563 This is done by switching to the
32567 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32572 This way, entering in the
32579 \begin_layout Itemize
32580 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32581 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32584 \begin_layout Itemize
32585 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32586 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32589 \begin_layout Itemize
32590 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32591 of it only within section headings.
32592 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32593 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32597 \begin_layout Itemize
32598 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32599 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32606 \begin_layout Standard
32607 The entries made in the
32611 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32614 \begin_inset space ~
32620 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32624 button or alternatively press
32627 arg "paragraph-break"
32634 while the cursor is in the
32637 \begin_inset space ~
32645 \begin_layout Standard
32646 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32648 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32652 \begin_layout Itemize
32653 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32654 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32662 with its typewriter version
32663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32677 \begin_layout Itemize
32678 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32684 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32696 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32703 (you may want to enable the
32706 \begin_inset space ~
32714 \begin_inset space ~
32719 options and disable the
32727 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32735 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32736 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32740 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32743 , or occurrences of
32744 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32748 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32754 \begin_layout Subsection
32758 \begin_layout Standard
32759 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32764 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32766 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32768 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32777 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32783 This is done with the context menu
32785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32786 Insert Regular Expression
32788 while the cursor is in the
32793 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32794 expression matching rules
32798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32799 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32806 \begin_inset space ~
32809 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32810 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32816 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32817 same text in the document.
32818 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32819 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32822 \begin_layout Enumerate
32823 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32828 editor the fraction
32829 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32833 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32836 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32837 fractions with the given denominator.
32840 \begin_layout Enumerate
32841 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32853 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32858 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32859 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32860 Also, by inserting a
32861 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32864 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32865 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32868 \begin_layout Standard
32869 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32870 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32871 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32874 , and referring back to them through
32875 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32879 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32883 For example, try searching with the regexp
32884 \begin_inset Newline newline
32887 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32890 \begin_inset Newline newline
32893 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32896 \begin_layout Standard
32897 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32900 \begin_layout Standard
32901 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32909 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32910 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32911 sub-expressions is absolute.
32913 \begin_inset space ~
32917 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32920 always refers to the first occurrence of
32921 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32924 in all entered regexps.
32932 \begin_layout Section
32934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32936 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32941 \begin_inset Index idx
32944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32953 \begin_layout Standard
32955 has a built-in spell checker.
32958 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32965 key or the toolbar button
32968 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32971 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32972 beginning of the currently selected text.
32973 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32974 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32975 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32976 scrolled so that it is visible.
32977 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32978 n, if any could be found.
32979 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32983 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32984 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32987 \begin_layout Standard
32988 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32995 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32996 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32998 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32999 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33002 \begin_inset space ~
33010 arg "dialog-show character"
33013 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33015 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33018 \begin_layout Standard
33019 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33020 can be downloaded from here:
33021 \begin_inset Newline newline
33025 \begin_inset Flex URL
33028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33030 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33036 \begin_inset Newline newline
33040 \begin_inset space ~
33043 files for each language.
33044 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33045 \begin_inset space ~
33048 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33049 's installation subfolder
33057 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33059 \begin_inset Newline newline
33062 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33063 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33064 but in most cases these are
33080 is the language code.
33083 \begin_layout Subsection
33087 \begin_layout Standard
33090 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33091 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33093 \begin_inset space ~
33096 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33099 you can set the following things:
33102 \begin_layout Description
33104 \begin_inset space ~
33107 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33108 should use for spell checking.
33109 Depending on your platform,
33123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33124 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33125 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33140 \begin_inset space ~
33143 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33146 \begin_layout Description
33148 \begin_inset space ~
33151 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33152 will always use the given language
33153 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33156 \begin_layout Description
33158 \begin_inset space ~
33161 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33167 \begin_inset space \space{}
33171 This should normally not be needed.
33174 \begin_layout Description
33176 \begin_inset space ~
33180 \begin_inset space ~
33183 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33195 \begin_layout Description
33197 \begin_inset space ~
33200 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33201 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33202 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33203 appear in a context menu.
33204 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33208 \begin_layout Description
33210 \begin_inset space ~
33214 \begin_inset space ~
33218 \begin_inset space ~
33221 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33225 \begin_layout Section
33227 \begin_inset Index idx
33230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33239 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33246 \begin_layout Standard
33248 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33249 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33259 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33261 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33270 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33272 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33273 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33274 which are available for many languages.
33277 \begin_layout Standard
33278 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33279 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33283 \begin_layout Subsection
33284 Setting up the thesaurus
33287 \begin_layout Standard
33296 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33300 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33305 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33311 \begin_inset space ~
33319 For instance, the US English files are named:
33322 \begin_layout Itemize
33326 \begin_layout Itemize
33330 \begin_layout Standard
33339 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33340 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33343 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33344 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33345 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33347 \begin_inset space ~
33352 ) to the path where they are installed.
33356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33357 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33358 ies, typical locations are
33364 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33368 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33372 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33375 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33381 LibreOffice-<Version>
33388 On the Mac, the default location is
33390 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33391 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33392 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33393 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33394 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33395 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33403 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33404 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33405 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33409 \begin_layout Standard
33410 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33411 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33415 \begin_layout Itemize
33416 \begin_inset Flex URL
33419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33421 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33429 \begin_layout Standard
33430 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33431 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33433 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33434 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33435 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33437 \begin_inset space ~
33442 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33444 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33445 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33449 \begin_layout Standard
33450 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33452 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33455 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33461 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33464 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33465 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33474 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33475 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33477 \begin_inset space ~
33482 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33485 \begin_layout Subsection
33486 Using the thesaurus
33489 \begin_layout Standard
33490 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33492 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33495 or the toolbar button
33498 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33501 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33503 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33505 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33506 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33507 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33516 ), related terms (such as
33519 \begin_inset space ~
33528 ), compounds (such as
33531 \begin_inset space ~
33540 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33549 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33552 \begin_layout Standard
33553 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33554 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33558 \begin_layout Standard
33559 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33560 the dictionary, such as the above
33564 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33565 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33569 \begin_inset space \space{}
33572 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33573 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33574 For example, looking up the word form
33578 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33583 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33588 \begin_inset space \space{}
33599 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33600 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33601 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33604 \begin_layout Section
33606 \begin_inset Index idx
33609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33616 \begin_inset Index idx
33619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33620 Document ! Change Tracking
33626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33628 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33635 \begin_layout Standard
33636 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33637 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33638 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33639 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33641 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33643 \begin_inset space ~
33646 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33648 \begin_inset space ~
33656 \begin_layout Standard
33657 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33671 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33672 You can change the color in
33674 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33675 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33677 \begin_inset space ~
33681 \begin_inset space ~
33686 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33692 \begin_inset Index idx
33695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33696 Color ! Change tracking
33701 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33702 's status bar when the
33703 cursor is in changed text.
33704 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33707 arg "changes-merge"
33713 \begin_layout Standard
33714 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33716 \begin_inset Index idx
33719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33728 \begin_layout Standard
33729 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33735 \begin_layout Standard
33736 \begin_inset Graphics
33737 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33745 \begin_layout Standard
33746 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33752 \begin_layout Standard
33753 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33756 \begin_layout Standard
33757 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33763 \begin_layout Standard
33764 \begin_inset Tabular
33765 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33766 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33767 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33768 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33778 arg "changes-track"
33786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33794 \begin_inset space ~
33797 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33799 \begin_inset space ~
33808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33817 arg "changes-output"
33825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33831 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33833 \begin_inset space ~
33836 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33842 \begin_inset space ~
33846 \begin_inset space ~
33855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33876 Jumps to the next change
33882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33891 arg "change-accept"
33899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33907 \begin_inset space ~
33910 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33912 \begin_inset space ~
33921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33930 arg "change-reject"
33938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33946 \begin_inset space ~
33949 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33951 \begin_inset space ~
33960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33969 arg "changes-merge"
33977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33985 \begin_inset space ~
33988 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33990 \begin_inset space ~
33999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34008 arg "all-changes-accept"
34016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34024 \begin_inset space ~
34027 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34029 \begin_inset space ~
34033 \begin_inset space ~
34042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34051 arg "all-changes-reject"
34059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34067 \begin_inset space ~
34070 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34072 \begin_inset space ~
34076 \begin_inset space ~
34085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34109 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34111 \begin_inset space ~
34120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34143 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34145 \begin_inset space ~
34161 \begin_layout Standard
34162 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34168 \begin_layout Standard
34169 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34189 \begin_layout Standard
34190 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34191 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34192 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34193 the next change after the current cursor position.
34194 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34195 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34196 step to the next change.
34197 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34200 \begin_layout Standard
34201 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34202 to describe a change.
34205 \begin_layout Standard
34206 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34212 \begin_inset Index idx
34215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34217 -packages ! dvipost
34223 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34225 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34231 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34235 \begin_layout Section
34236 Comparison of Documents
34237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34239 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34244 \begin_inset Index idx
34247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34248 Comparison of documents
34256 \begin_layout Standard
34257 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34260 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34264 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34265 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34267 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34269 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34273 \begin_inset space ~
34277 \begin_inset space ~
34281 \begin_inset space ~
34290 \begin_inset space ~
34294 \begin_inset space ~
34298 \begin_inset space ~
34302 \begin_inset space ~
34306 \begin_inset space ~
34310 \begin_inset space ~
34315 enables the change tracking option
34318 \begin_inset space ~
34322 \begin_inset space ~
34326 \begin_inset space ~
34331 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34334 \begin_layout Section
34335 International Support
34336 \begin_inset Index idx
34339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34340 International support
34348 \begin_layout Standard
34349 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34350 with any language you want.
34351 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34352 up \SpecialChar LyX
34354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34356 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34363 \begin_layout Standard
34364 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34365 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34366 \begin_inset space ~
34370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34372 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34379 \begin_layout Subsection
34381 \begin_inset Index idx
34384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34391 \begin_inset Index idx
34394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34395 Document ! Settings
34401 \begin_inset Index idx
34404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34405 Document ! Language
34413 \begin_layout Standard
34416 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34417 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34420 dialog lets you set
34422 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34427 \begin_layout Standard
34432 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34437 \begin_inset space ~
34442 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34443 For details about the different encoding options see section
34444 \begin_inset space ~
34448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34450 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34457 \begin_layout Subsection
34458 Keyboard mapping configuration
34459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34461 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34469 If you have for example a U.
34470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34473 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34474 can use an alternate keymap.
34475 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34480 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34481 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34482 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34485 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34486 \begin_inset space ~
34490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34492 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34497 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34498 which one you want to use.
34501 \begin_layout Standard
34502 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34503 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34504 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34508 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34509 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34510 one to support the characters you want.
34511 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34518 \begin_layout Chapter
34521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34523 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34530 \begin_layout Standard
34531 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34532 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34533 topic inside the user's guide.
34536 \begin_layout Section
34538 \begin_inset Index idx
34541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34550 \begin_layout Standard
34555 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34558 \begin_layout Subsection
34562 \begin_layout Standard
34563 Creates a new document.
34566 \begin_layout Subsection
34570 \begin_layout Standard
34571 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34572 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34573 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34576 \begin_layout Subsection
34580 \begin_layout Standard
34584 \begin_layout Subsection
34588 \begin_layout Standard
34589 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34590 Click there on a file to open it.
34593 \begin_layout Subsection
34597 \begin_layout Standard
34598 Closes the current document.
34601 \begin_layout Subsection
34605 \begin_layout Standard
34606 Closes all opened documents.
34609 \begin_layout Subsection
34613 \begin_layout Standard
34614 Saves the actual document.
34617 \begin_layout Subsection
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34622 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34625 \begin_layout Subsection
34629 \begin_layout Standard
34630 Saves all opened documents.
34633 \begin_layout Subsection
34637 \begin_layout Standard
34638 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34641 \begin_layout Subsection
34645 \begin_layout Standard
34646 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34647 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34648 It is described in the section
34650 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34655 Additional Features
34660 \begin_layout Subsection
34664 \begin_layout Standard
34665 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34666 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34668 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34669 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34673 \begin_layout Standard
34674 When using the menu entry
34677 \begin_inset space ~
34682 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34686 \begin_inset space ~
34690 \begin_inset space ~
34694 \begin_inset space ~
34699 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34700 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34703 \begin_layout Subsection
34705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34707 name "subsec:Export"
34714 \begin_layout Standard
34715 You can export your document to various file formats.
34716 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34718 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34719 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34720 during its configuration.
34723 \begin_layout Standard
34724 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34726 \begin_inset space ~
34730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34732 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34739 \begin_layout Description
34745 \begin_inset space ~
34748 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34750 \begin_inset space ~
34753 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34754 \begin_inset Newline newline
34757 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34758 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34762 \begin_layout Description
34763 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34769 \begin_layout Description
34771 \begin_inset space ~
34774 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34780 \begin_layout Description
34781 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34782 's native DVI-format.
34783 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34784 files paths or file names in your document.
34786 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34793 \begin_layout Description
34794 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34795 in files paths or file names
34798 \begin_layout Description
34800 \begin_inset space ~
34807 ) DVI-format using the program
34809 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34812 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34824 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34832 \begin_layout Description
34834 \begin_inset space ~
34837 (cropped) the same as
34841 but with cropped page margins.
34844 \begin_layout Description
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34849 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34853 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34858 \begin_layout Description
34862 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34870 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34878 \begin_layout Description
34880 \begin_inset space ~
34884 \begin_inset space ~
34887 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34891 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34899 \begin_layout Description
34903 \begin_inset space ~
34912 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34913 source that is compilable with the program
34915 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34919 \begin_layout Description
34923 \begin_inset space ~
34928 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34929 source, additionally all images used in the document
34930 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34934 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34937 \begin_layout Description
34941 \begin_inset space ~
34946 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34947 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34948 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34956 \begin_layout Description
34960 \begin_inset space ~
34969 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34970 source that is compilable with the program
34976 \begin_layout Description
34978 \begin_inset space ~
34982 \begin_inset space ~
34989 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34990 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34996 \begin_layout Description
34998 \begin_inset space ~
35001 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35002 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35008 \begin_inset space \space{}
35013 \begin_inset space ~
35017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35032 represent the version number)
35035 \begin_layout Description
35037 \begin_inset space ~
35041 \begin_inset space ~
35044 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35045 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35046 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35050 \begin_layout Description
35051 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35052 's internal XHTML engine
35055 \begin_layout Description
35057 \begin_inset space ~
35061 \begin_inset space ~
35065 \begin_inset space ~
35069 \begin_inset space ~
35072 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35077 For the conversion the program
35086 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35089 \begin_layout Description
35090 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35095 \begin_layout Description
35097 \begin_inset space ~
35100 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35102 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35105 For the conversion the program
35114 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35117 \begin_layout Description
35119 \begin_inset space ~
35122 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35123 For the conversion the program
35132 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35135 \begin_layout Description
35137 \begin_inset space ~
35140 (cropped) the same as
35143 \begin_inset space ~
35148 but with cropped page margins
35151 \begin_layout Description
35155 \begin_inset space ~
35160 PDF-format using the program
35164 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35167 \begin_layout Description
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35188 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35193 \begin_inset space \space{}
35196 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35200 \begin_layout Description
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35209 PDF-format using the program
35211 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35214 , produces PDF-files directly
35217 \begin_layout Description
35221 \begin_inset space ~
35226 PDF-format using the program
35230 , produces PDF-files directly
35233 \begin_layout Description
35237 \begin_inset space ~
35242 PDF-format using the program
35246 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35249 \begin_layout Description
35253 \begin_inset space ~
35258 PDF-format using the program
35263 , produces PDF-files directly
35266 \begin_layout Description
35270 \begin_inset space ~
35278 \begin_layout Description
35282 \begin_inset space ~
35286 \begin_inset space ~
35291 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35292 and then exported as text using the program
35297 \begin_layout Description
35302 PostScript format using the program
35310 options see section
35311 \begin_inset space ~
35315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35317 reference "subsec:General-output"
35324 \begin_layout Description
35325 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35326 source and also code in the statistical programming
35340 it is possible to use
35344 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35348 \begin_layout Standard
35349 If one of the menu entries
35356 \begin_inset space ~
35365 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35367 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35369 \begin_inset space ~
35373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35375 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35380 \begin_inset Index idx
35383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35384 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35393 \begin_layout Subsection
35397 \begin_layout Standard
35398 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35399 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35402 \begin_inset space ~
35406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35408 reference "sec:Paths"
35413 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35422 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35423 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35424 's preferences as described in section
35425 \begin_inset space ~
35429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35431 reference "subsec:Converters"
35438 \begin_layout Subsection
35439 New and Close Window
35442 \begin_layout Standard
35443 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35447 \begin_layout Subsection
35451 \begin_layout Standard
35452 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35455 \begin_layout Section
35457 \begin_inset Index idx
35460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35469 \begin_layout Subsection
35473 \begin_layout Standard
35474 Described in section
35475 \begin_inset space ~
35479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35481 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35488 \begin_layout Subsection
35489 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35492 \begin_layout Standard
35493 Described in section
35494 \begin_inset space ~
35498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35500 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35507 \begin_layout Subsection
35511 \begin_layout Standard
35512 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35513 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35516 \begin_layout Subsection
35520 \begin_layout Standard
35521 Selects the whole document.
35524 \begin_layout Subsection
35525 Find & Replace (Quick)
35528 \begin_layout Standard
35529 Described in section
35530 \begin_inset space ~
35534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35536 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35543 \begin_layout Subsection
35544 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35547 \begin_layout Standard
35548 Described in section
35549 \begin_inset space ~
35553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35555 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35562 \begin_layout Subsection
35563 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35566 \begin_layout Standard
35567 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35571 \begin_layout Subsection
35575 \begin_layout Standard
35576 Described in section
35577 \begin_inset space ~
35581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35583 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35590 \begin_layout Subsection
35592 \begin_inset Index idx
35595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35596 Paragraph ! Settings
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35605 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35606 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35610 \begin_layout Standard
35611 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35612 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35618 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35619 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35629 \begin_layout Subsection
35630 Table and Rows & Columns
35633 \begin_layout Standard
35634 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35635 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35636 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35639 \begin_layout Subsection
35643 \begin_layout Standard
35644 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35645 It will dissolve this inset.
35646 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35650 \begin_layout Subsection
35654 \begin_layout Standard
35655 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35656 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35659 \begin_layout Subsection
35660 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35663 \begin_layout Standard
35664 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35666 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35667 \begin_inset space ~
35671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35673 reference "sec:Nesting"
35678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35680 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35687 \begin_layout Subsection
35690 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35693 \begin_layout Standard
35694 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35695 nts of the same type.
35697 \begin_inset space ~
35701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35703 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35707 for an explanation.
35710 \begin_layout Section
35712 \begin_inset Index idx
35715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35724 \begin_layout Standard
35725 At the bottom of the
35729 menu the opened documents are listed.
35732 \begin_layout Subsection
35733 Open/Close all Insets
35736 \begin_layout Standard
35737 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35740 \begin_layout Subsection
35741 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35744 \begin_layout Standard
35745 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35748 \begin_layout Standard
35749 Math macros are described in the
35756 \begin_layout Subsection
35760 \begin_layout Standard
35761 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35762 \begin_inset space ~
35766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35768 reference "sec:Navigating"
35773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35775 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35782 \begin_layout Subsection
35786 \begin_layout Standard
35787 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35789 \begin_inset space ~
35793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35795 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35802 \begin_layout Subsection
35806 \begin_layout Standard
35807 Opens a window showing console messages.
35808 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35813 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35814 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35815 is processing the document.
35818 \begin_layout Subsection
35820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35822 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35827 \begin_inset Index idx
35830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35839 \begin_layout Standard
35840 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35841 All toolbars and the
35844 \begin_inset space ~
35849 can be turned on and off.
35854 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35866 \begin_inset space ~
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35883 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35887 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35894 \begin_layout Standard
35899 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35903 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35904 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35905 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35906 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35907 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35910 \begin_layout Standard
35912 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35913 \begin_inset space ~
35917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35919 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35926 \begin_layout Subsection
35930 \begin_layout Standard
35934 \begin_inset space ~
35938 \begin_inset space ~
35942 \begin_inset space ~
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35950 \begin_inset space ~
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35959 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35960 's main window vertically while
35963 \begin_inset space ~
35967 \begin_inset space ~
35971 \begin_inset space ~
35975 \begin_inset space ~
35979 \begin_inset space ~
35983 \begin_inset space ~
35988 will split it horizontally.
35989 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35990 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35991 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35992 three or more documents at the same time.
35993 To close a split view, use the menu
35996 \begin_inset space ~
36000 \begin_inset space ~
36008 \begin_layout Subsection
36012 \begin_layout Standard
36013 Closes a split view.
36016 \begin_layout Subsection
36020 \begin_layout Standard
36021 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36022 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36023 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36024 's main window fullscreen.
36025 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36026 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36029 \begin_layout Section
36031 \begin_inset Index idx
36034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36043 \begin_layout Subsection
36047 \begin_layout Standard
36048 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36049 \begin_inset space ~
36053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36055 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36066 \begin_layout Subsection
36068 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36070 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36077 \begin_layout Standard
36078 Here you can insert the following characters:
36081 \begin_layout Description
36086 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36089 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36090 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36091 -packages you have installed.
36092 You can get a complete display by checking
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36101 \begin_inset Newline newline
36105 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36113 Not all characters will be visible in the
36117 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36118 dialog (see section
36119 \begin_inset space ~
36123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36125 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36129 ) can display every character.
36137 \begin_layout Description
36138 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36142 \begin_layout Description
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36148 \begin_inset space ~
36151 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36152 \begin_inset space ~
36156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36158 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36165 \begin_layout Description
36167 \begin_inset space ~
36170 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36180 \begin_layout Description
36182 \begin_inset space ~
36185 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36188 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36189 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36195 \begin_layout Description
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36200 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36204 \begin_layout Description
36206 \begin_inset space ~
36209 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36213 \begin_layout Description
36215 \begin_inset space ~
36218 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36224 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36230 \begin_layout Description
36232 \begin_inset space ~
36235 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36239 \begin_layout Description
36241 \begin_inset space ~
36245 \begin_inset Index idx
36248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36255 \begin_inset Index idx
36258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36259 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36264 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36265 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36267 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36273 \begin_inset Index idx
36276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36284 \begin_inset Newline newline
36287 More information about this feature can be found in the
36293 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36299 \begin_layout Description
36300 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36302 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36303 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36307 \begin_layout Subsection
36311 \begin_layout Standard
36312 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36315 \begin_layout Description
36316 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36317 \begin_inset script superscript
36319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36328 \begin_layout Description
36329 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36330 \begin_inset script subscript
36332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36341 \begin_layout Description
36343 \begin_inset space ~
36346 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36347 \begin_inset space ~
36351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36353 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36360 \begin_layout Description
36362 \begin_inset space ~
36365 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36366 \begin_inset space ~
36370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36372 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36379 \begin_layout Description
36381 \begin_inset space ~
36384 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36385 \begin_inset space ~
36389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36391 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36398 \begin_layout Description
36400 \begin_inset space ~
36403 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36409 \begin_inset space \space{}
36412 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36413 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36422 To insert a fraction use the command
36427 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36431 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36440 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36447 \begin_layout Description
36449 \begin_inset space ~
36452 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36453 \begin_inset space ~
36457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36459 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36466 \begin_layout Description
36468 \begin_inset space ~
36471 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36472 \begin_inset space ~
36476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36478 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36485 \begin_layout Description
36487 \begin_inset space ~
36490 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36497 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36504 \begin_layout Description
36505 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36506 \begin_inset space ~
36510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36512 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36519 \begin_layout Description
36521 \begin_inset space ~
36524 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36525 \begin_inset space ~
36529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36531 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36538 \begin_layout Description
36540 \begin_inset space ~
36543 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36544 \begin_inset space ~
36548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36550 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36557 \begin_layout Description
36559 \begin_inset space ~
36563 \begin_inset space ~
36566 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36567 \begin_inset space ~
36571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36573 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36580 \begin_layout Description
36582 \begin_inset space ~
36585 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36586 as described in section
36587 \begin_inset space ~
36591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36593 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36600 \begin_layout Description
36602 \begin_inset space ~
36605 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36606 \begin_inset space ~
36610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36612 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36619 \begin_layout Description
36621 \begin_inset space ~
36624 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36625 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36627 \begin_inset space ~
36631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36633 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36640 \begin_layout Description
36642 \begin_inset space ~
36645 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36646 \begin_inset space ~
36650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36652 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36659 \begin_layout Description
36661 \begin_inset space ~
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36668 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36669 \begin_inset space ~
36673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36675 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36682 \begin_layout Subsection
36686 \begin_layout Standard
36687 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36691 \begin_inset space ~
36712 are described in section
36713 \begin_inset space ~
36717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36719 reference "sec:toc"
36728 is described in section
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36735 reference "sec:Index"
36743 is described in section
36744 \begin_inset space ~
36748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36750 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36756 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36759 is described in section
36760 \begin_inset space ~
36764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36766 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36773 \begin_layout Subsection
36777 \begin_layout Standard
36778 To insert floats, as described in section
36779 \begin_inset space ~
36783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36785 reference "sec:Floats"
36789 and in detail the chapter
36796 \begin_inset space ~
36804 \begin_layout Subsection
36808 \begin_layout Standard
36809 To insert notes, described in section
36810 \begin_inset space ~
36814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36816 reference "sec:Notes"
36823 \begin_layout Subsection
36827 \begin_layout Standard
36828 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36830 Branches are described in section
36831 \begin_inset space ~
36835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36837 reference "sec:Branches"
36844 \begin_layout Subsection
36848 \begin_layout Standard
36849 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36850 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36852 An example is the document class
36853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36860 with three custom insets.
36863 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36867 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36873 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36876 \begin_layout Subsection
36878 \begin_inset Index idx
36881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36890 \begin_layout Standard
36891 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36893 For more information see chapter
36895 External Document Parts
36898 \begin_inset space ~
36904 \begin_layout Subsection
36906 \begin_inset Index idx
36909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36919 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36920 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36927 \begin_inset space ~
36935 \begin_layout Subsection
36939 \begin_layout Standard
36944 dialog as described in section
36945 \begin_inset space ~
36949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36951 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36958 \begin_layout Subsection
36962 \begin_layout Standard
36967 as described in section
36968 \begin_inset space ~
36972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36974 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36981 \begin_layout Subsection
36985 \begin_layout Standard
36990 as described in section
36991 \begin_inset space ~
36995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36997 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37004 \begin_layout Subsection
37006 \begin_inset Index idx
37009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37016 \begin_inset Index idx
37019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37020 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
37028 \begin_layout Standard
37029 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
37030 Floats are described in section
37031 \begin_inset space ~
37035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37037 reference "sec:Floats"
37041 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37043 Multi-page Captions
37048 \begin_inset space ~
37056 \begin_layout Subsection
37060 \begin_layout Standard
37061 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37062 \begin_inset space ~
37066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37068 reference "sec:Index"
37075 \begin_layout Subsection
37079 \begin_layout Standard
37080 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37081 \begin_inset space ~
37085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37087 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37094 \begin_layout Subsection
37098 \begin_layout Standard
37099 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37100 Tables are described in section
37101 \begin_inset space ~
37105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37107 reference "sec:Tables"
37111 and in detail in the chapter
37118 \begin_inset space ~
37126 \begin_layout Subsection
37130 \begin_layout Standard
37136 Graphics are described in section
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37143 reference "sec:Graphics"
37150 \begin_layout Subsection
37154 \begin_layout Standard
37155 Inserts a URL as described in section
37156 \begin_inset space ~
37160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37162 reference "subsec:URLs"
37169 \begin_layout Subsection
37173 \begin_layout Standard
37174 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37181 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37188 \begin_layout Subsection
37192 \begin_layout Standard
37193 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37200 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37207 \begin_layout Subsection
37211 \begin_layout Standard
37212 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37213 \begin_inset space ~
37217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37219 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37226 \begin_layout Subsection
37230 \begin_layout Standard
37231 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37232 title or caption of a float.
37233 Inserts a short title as described in section
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37240 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37247 \begin_layout Subsection
37252 \begin_layout Standard
37253 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37254 Code box as described in section
37255 \begin_inset space ~
37259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37261 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37268 \begin_layout Subsection
37270 \begin_inset Index idx
37273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37282 \begin_layout Standard
37283 Inserts a program listings box.
37284 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37286 Program Code Listings
37291 \begin_inset space ~
37299 \begin_layout Subsection
37303 \begin_layout Standard
37304 Inserts the actual date.
37305 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37309 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37317 \begin_inset space ~
37325 \begin_layout Subsection
37329 \begin_layout Standard
37330 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37337 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37344 \begin_layout Section
37346 \begin_inset Index idx
37349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37358 \begin_layout Standard
37359 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37360 \begin_inset space ~
37363 of the current document.
37364 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37367 \begin_layout Subsection
37371 \begin_layout Standard
37372 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37373 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37374 to jump, for example, between section
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37379 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37383 2.5 and use the submenu
37386 \begin_inset space ~
37390 \begin_inset space ~
37397 \begin_inset space ~
37403 \begin_inset space ~
37407 \begin_inset space ~
37413 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37417 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37423 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37426 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37429 \begin_layout Standard
37430 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37434 \begin_inset space ~
37439 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37442 \begin_inset space ~
37447 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37450 \begin_layout Subsection
37451 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37454 \begin_layout Standard
37455 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37459 \begin_layout Subsection
37463 \begin_layout Standard
37464 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37465 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37466 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37470 \begin_inset space ~
37474 \begin_inset space ~
37482 \begin_layout Subsection
37486 \begin_layout Standard
37487 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37490 The \SpecialChar LyX
37491 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37493 \begin_inset space ~
37501 \begin_inset space ~
37506 manual for a detailed description.
37509 \begin_layout Section
37511 \begin_inset Index idx
37514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37523 \begin_layout Subsection
37527 \begin_layout Standard
37528 Change Tracking is described in section
37529 \begin_inset space ~
37533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37535 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37542 \begin_layout Subsection
37550 \begin_layout Standard
37551 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37552 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37553 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37555 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37556 to the clipboard or update the view.
37557 \begin_inset Newline newline
37560 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37564 \begin_layout Standard
37567 Open Containing Directory
37569 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37570 's temporary folder for the document.
37571 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37572 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37573 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37574 For example some journals require to send the
37578 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37582 \begin_layout Subsection
37583 Start Appendix Here
37586 \begin_layout Standard
37587 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37588 as described in section
37589 \begin_inset space ~
37593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37595 reference "sec:Appendices"
37602 \begin_layout Subsection
37604 \begin_inset space ~
37610 \begin_layout Standard
37611 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37612 default output format for the document (menu
37614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37615 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37616 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37622 \begin_inset space ~
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37634 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
37638 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37641 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37642 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37647 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37649 \begin_inset space ~
37652 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37654 \begin_inset space ~
37658 \begin_inset space ~
37664 \begin_inset space ~
37668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37670 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37674 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37675 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37677 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37678 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37680 \begin_inset space ~
37683 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37685 \begin_inset space ~
37688 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37692 \begin_inset space ~
37696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37698 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37703 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37704 when it is first configured.
37705 The default output format is
37708 \begin_inset space ~
37716 \begin_layout Subsection
37717 View (Other Formats)
37720 \begin_layout Standard
37721 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37722 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37723 actual document with an external program.
37724 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37725 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37726 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37728 All possible formats are listed in section
37729 \begin_inset space ~
37733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37735 reference "subsec:Export"
37740 You should at least see the menu entry
37745 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37747 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37749 \begin_inset space ~
37753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37755 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37760 \begin_inset Index idx
37763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37764 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37773 \begin_layout Standard
37774 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37775 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37777 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37778 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37780 \begin_inset space ~
37783 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37785 \begin_inset space ~
37788 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37792 \begin_inset space ~
37796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37798 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37803 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37804 when it is first configured.
37807 \begin_layout Subsection
37809 \begin_inset space ~
37815 \begin_layout Standard
37816 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37817 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37820 \begin_layout Subsection
37821 Update (Other Formats)
37824 \begin_layout Standard
37825 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37826 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37829 \begin_layout Subsection
37830 View Master Document
37833 \begin_layout Standard
37834 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37850 \begin_inset space ~
37855 manual for more information on this topic).
37856 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37857 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37861 \begin_inset space ~
37865 \begin_inset space ~
37870 generates the output of the whole book, while
37874 will just output the chapter alone.
37877 \begin_layout Standard
37878 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37879 in the document settings (menu
37881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37882 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37883 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37885 \begin_inset space ~
37889 \begin_inset space ~
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37901 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
37905 ) or in the preferences (menu
37907 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37908 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37910 \begin_inset space ~
37913 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37915 \begin_inset space ~
37918 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37920 \begin_inset space ~
37924 \begin_inset space ~
37930 \begin_inset space ~
37934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37936 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37943 \begin_layout Subsection
37944 Update Master Document
37947 \begin_layout Standard
37948 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37964 \begin_inset space ~
37969 manual for more information on this topic).
37970 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37971 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37974 \begin_layout Standard
37975 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37976 in the document settings (menu
37978 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37979 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37980 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37982 \begin_inset space ~
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37992 \begin_inset space ~
37996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37998 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38002 ) or in the preferences (menu
38004 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38005 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38007 \begin_inset space ~
38010 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38012 \begin_inset space ~
38015 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38017 \begin_inset space ~
38021 \begin_inset space ~
38027 \begin_inset space ~
38031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38033 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38040 \begin_layout Subsection
38042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38044 name "subsec:Compressed"
38051 \begin_layout Standard
38052 Un/compresses the current document.
38053 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38054 compression (see the
38056 Additional Features
38058 manual for details).
38061 \begin_layout Subsection
38065 \begin_layout Standard
38066 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38069 \begin_layout Subsection
38073 \begin_layout Standard
38074 The document settings are described in appendix
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38081 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38088 \begin_layout Section
38090 \begin_inset Index idx
38093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38102 \begin_layout Subsection
38106 \begin_layout Standard
38107 Spell checking is explained in section
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38114 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38121 \begin_layout Subsection
38125 \begin_layout Standard
38126 The thesaurus is described in section
38127 \begin_inset space ~
38131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38133 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38140 \begin_layout Subsection
38142 \begin_inset Index idx
38145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38152 \begin_inset Index idx
38155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38164 \begin_layout Standard
38165 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38166 the highlighted document part.
38169 \begin_layout Subsection
38175 \begin_inset Index idx
38178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38179 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38188 \begin_layout Standard
38189 Generates with the help of the program
38191 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38194 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38195 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38196 This feature is not available on Windows.
38199 \begin_layout Subsection
38205 \begin_inset Index idx
38208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38218 \begin_layout Standard
38219 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38224 \begin_inset space ~
38229 to see the full filename paths.
38232 \begin_layout Subsection
38234 \begin_inset Index idx
38237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38246 \begin_layout Standard
38247 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38248 files as described in section
38249 \begin_inset space ~
38253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38255 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38262 \begin_layout Subsection
38264 \begin_inset Index idx
38267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38280 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38298 \begin_inset Index idx
38301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38311 \begin_layout Standard
38312 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38313 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38314 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38315 -packages and programs it needs; see
38317 \begin_inset space ~
38321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38323 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38330 \begin_layout Subsection
38334 \begin_layout Standard
38339 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38340 \begin_inset space ~
38344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38346 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38353 \begin_layout Section
38355 \begin_inset Index idx
38358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38367 \begin_layout Standard
38368 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38369 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38371 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38375 \begin_layout Standard
38379 \begin_inset space ~
38384 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38385 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38386 packages and classes found
38387 by \SpecialChar LyX
38389 \begin_inset space ~
38393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38395 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38402 \begin_layout Standard
38406 \begin_inset space ~
38411 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38416 \begin_layout Section
38418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38420 name "sec:Toolbars"
38427 \begin_layout Standard
38428 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38429 \begin_inset space ~
38433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38435 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38442 \begin_layout Standard
38443 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38444 This is described in the
38446 Additional Features
38451 \begin_layout Subsection
38453 \begin_inset Index idx
38456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 \begin_layout Standard
38466 \begin_inset Graphics
38467 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38475 \begin_layout Standard
38476 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38482 \begin_layout Standard
38483 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38500 \begin_inset Note Note
38503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38504 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38509 manual for more information.
38517 \begin_layout Standard
38518 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38524 \begin_layout Standard
38525 \begin_inset Tabular
38526 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38527 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38528 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38529 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38535 \begin_inset Graphics
38536 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38550 pull-down box for the environments
38563 \begin_layout Standard
38564 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38570 \begin_layout Standard
38572 \begin_inset Tabular
38573 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38574 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38575 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38576 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38577 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38600 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38607 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38630 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38660 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38676 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38690 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38706 arg "spelling-continuously"
38714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 Spellcheck continuously
38724 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38747 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38777 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38807 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38837 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38867 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38883 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38897 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38923 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38937 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38965 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38979 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38980 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39008 Emphasize text, function of the
39010 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39012 \begin_inset space ~
39015 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39024 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39045 Set text to noun style, function of the
39047 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39049 \begin_inset space ~
39052 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39070 arg "textstyle-apply"
39078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39082 Format text using the current settings in the
39084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39089 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39098 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39122 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39124 \begin_inset space ~
39133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39142 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39170 arg "tabular-insert"
39178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39200 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39212 Toggle outline window on/off,
39214 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39230 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39242 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39257 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39269 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39282 \begin_layout Subsection
39284 \begin_inset Index idx
39287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 \begin_layout Standard
39297 \begin_inset Graphics
39298 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39306 \begin_layout Standard
39307 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39313 \begin_layout Standard
39314 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39318 \begin_layout Standard
39319 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39325 \begin_layout Standard
39326 \begin_inset Tabular
39327 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39328 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39329 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39330 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39331 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39358 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39367 arg "layout Enumerate"
39375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39385 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39394 arg "layout Itemize"
39402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39439 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39448 arg "layout Description"
39456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39466 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39475 arg "depth-increment"
39483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39489 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39491 \begin_inset space ~
39495 \begin_inset space ~
39504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39513 arg "depth-decrement"
39521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39527 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39529 \begin_inset space ~
39533 \begin_inset space ~
39542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39551 arg "float-insert figure"
39559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39566 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39582 arg "float-insert table"
39590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39596 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39597 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39643 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39673 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39694 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39717 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39719 \begin_inset space ~
39728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39737 arg "nomencl-insert"
39745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39753 \begin_inset space ~
39762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39771 arg "footnote-insert"
39779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39801 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39817 \begin_inset space ~
39826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39850 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39852 \begin_inset space ~
39861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39870 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39884 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39946 \begin_inset space ~
39955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39964 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39978 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39979 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39995 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40010 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40030 arg "dialog-show character"
40038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40044 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40046 \begin_inset space ~
40049 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40065 arg "layout-paragraph"
40073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40079 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40081 \begin_inset space ~
40090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40099 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40113 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40127 \begin_layout Subsection
40128 View/Update Toolbar
40129 \begin_inset Index idx
40132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40133 Toolbar ! View / Update
40141 \begin_layout Standard
40142 \begin_inset Graphics
40143 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40150 \begin_layout Standard
40151 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40157 \begin_layout Standard
40158 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40162 \begin_layout Standard
40163 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40169 \begin_layout Standard
40170 \begin_inset Tabular
40171 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40172 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40173 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40174 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40198 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40214 arg "buffer-update"
40222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40228 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40244 arg "master-buffer-view"
40252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40278 arg "master-buffer-update"
40286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40292 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40294 \begin_inset space ~
40298 \begin_inset space ~
40307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40316 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40330 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40331 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40332 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40333 Synchronize with Output
40339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40363 View (Other Formats)
40369 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40376 arg "update-others"
40384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40390 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40391 Update (Other Formats)
40404 \begin_layout Standard
40405 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40409 \begin_layout Subsection
40413 \begin_layout Standard
40414 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40415 \begin_inset space ~
40419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40421 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40425 , the table toolbar
40426 \begin_inset Index idx
40429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40438 \begin_inset space ~
40443 manual and the math macro toolbar
40444 \begin_inset Index idx
40447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40460 \begin_layout Chapter
40461 The Document Settings
40462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40464 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40469 \begin_inset Index idx
40472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40473 Document ! Settings
40481 \begin_layout Standard
40485 \begin_inset space ~
40490 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40491 is called with the menu
40493 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40497 You can save your document settings as default with the
40499 Save as Document Defaults
40501 button in any dialog.
40502 This will create a template named
40506 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40507 when you create a new document without
40511 \begin_layout Standard
40516 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40517 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40520 \begin_layout Standard
40521 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40522 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40523 to find the one you are looking for.
40524 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40525 the submenus of the dialog.
40527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40531 \begin_inset space \space{}
40535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40542 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40543 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40544 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40547 \begin_layout Section
40551 \begin_layout Standard
40552 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40554 Document classes are described in section
40555 \begin_inset space ~
40559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40561 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40569 \begin_layout Standard
40573 \begin_inset space ~
40578 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40583 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40584 as a layout for a document class.
40585 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40587 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40597 Some classes use special class options by default.
40598 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40602 and you can decide to use them or not.
40603 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40604 recommended you leave them untouched.
40609 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40610 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40615 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40617 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40623 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40624 \begin_inset Newline newline
40629 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40632 \begin_inset Newline newline
40635 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40636 distribution, see section
40641 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40643 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40655 \begin_layout Standard
40660 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40661 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40662 in the background if the child document
40663 is opened without its master.
40664 This way child documents are always compilable.
40665 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40672 \begin_inset space ~
40680 \begin_layout Standard
40681 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40692 \begin_inset Index idx
40695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40697 -packages ! prettyref
40703 \begin_inset Index idx
40706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40708 -packages ! refstyle
40713 for cross-references, see section
40714 \begin_inset space ~
40718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40720 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40727 \begin_layout Section
40731 \begin_layout Standard
40732 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40733 Please refer to the section
40736 \begin_inset space ~
40744 \begin_inset space ~
40749 manual for details.
40752 \begin_layout Section
40756 \begin_layout Standard
40757 Modules are explained in section
40758 \begin_inset space ~
40762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40764 reference "subsec:Modules"
40771 \begin_layout Section
40775 \begin_layout Standard
40777 \begin_inset space ~
40781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40783 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40790 \begin_layout Section
40794 \begin_layout Standard
40795 The document font settings are described in section
40796 \begin_inset space ~
40800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40802 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40809 \begin_layout Section
40813 \begin_layout Standard
40814 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40831 and whether it should be a
40834 \begin_inset space ~
40839 can also be specified here.
40842 \begin_layout Standard
40843 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40844 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40845 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40847 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40850 \begin_layout Standard
40853 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40856 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40857 justifies the text on screen.
40858 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40862 \begin_layout Section
40866 \begin_layout Standard
40867 This dialog is described in sections
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40874 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40881 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40888 \begin_layout Section
40892 \begin_layout Standard
40893 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40894 \begin_inset space ~
40898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40900 reference "subsec:Margins"
40907 \begin_layout Section
40909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40911 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40916 \begin_inset Index idx
40919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40920 Language ! Encoding
40928 \begin_layout Standard
40929 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40930 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40931 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40933 is always encoded in utf8).
40934 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40935 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40936 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40937 -command is not known for
40938 a particular character).
40941 \begin_layout Standard
40942 If you use the option
40947 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40948 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40949 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40951 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40952 exactly one encoding.
40953 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40956 \begin_layout Standard
40958 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40959 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40960 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40961 installation supports Unicode), choose
40962 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40963 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40964 is quite incomplete, so
40965 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40970 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40971 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40972 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40973 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40974 -commands is not used, because all
40975 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40976 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40977 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40978 , two new alternative engines
40979 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40981 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40983 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40986 \begin_inset space ~
40994 \begin_inset space ~
41002 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41014 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41019 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41023 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41026 \begin_layout Standard
41030 \begin_inset space ~
41035 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41036 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41046 The possible settings are:
41049 \begin_layout Description
41050 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41052 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41053 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41063 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41070 \begin_layout Description
41071 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41072 format you will use.
41073 In many cases this will be
41078 \begin_inset Index idx
41081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41089 If the newer package
41094 \begin_inset Index idx
41097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41099 -packages ! polyglossia
41104 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41105 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41106 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41108 this package will be used instead of
41115 \begin_layout Description
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41128 would be more appropriate.
41131 \begin_layout Description
41132 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41133 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41137 (for German texts), type in
41140 \begin_inset Newline newline
41145 usepackage{ngerman}
41148 \begin_layout Description
41149 None will not use a language package.
41150 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41153 \begin_layout Standard
41154 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41157 \begin_layout Description
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41163 \begin_inset space ~
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41174 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41180 \begin_inset Index idx
41183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41185 -packages ! inputenc
41191 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41192 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41193 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41197 \begin_layout Description
41198 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41200 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41201 commands, which may result in a big
41202 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41203 -commands are needed.
41206 \begin_layout Description
41208 \begin_inset space ~
41212 \begin_inset space ~
41215 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41218 \begin_layout Description
41220 \begin_inset space ~
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41227 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41230 \begin_layout Description
41232 \begin_inset space ~
41235 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41238 \begin_layout Description
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41244 \begin_inset space ~
41247 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41248 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41251 \begin_layout Description
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41260 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41264 \begin_layout Description
41266 \begin_inset space ~
41270 \begin_inset space ~
41273 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41274 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41277 \begin_layout Description
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41283 \begin_inset space ~
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41290 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41297 \begin_layout Description
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41307 \begin_inset space ~
41310 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41311 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41314 \begin_layout Description
41316 \begin_inset space ~
41320 \begin_inset space ~
41323 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41324 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41325 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41326 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_layout Description
41339 \begin_inset space ~
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41346 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41347 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41348 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41350 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_layout Description
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41370 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41373 \begin_layout Description
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41382 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41385 \begin_layout Description
41387 \begin_inset space ~
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41394 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41397 \begin_layout Description
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41402 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41405 \begin_layout Description
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41410 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41413 \begin_layout Description
41415 \begin_inset space ~
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41422 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41425 \begin_layout Description
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41437 \begin_layout Description
41439 \begin_inset space ~
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41446 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41449 \begin_layout Description
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41461 \begin_layout Description
41463 \begin_inset space ~
41467 \begin_inset space ~
41470 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41476 \begin_inset Index idx
41479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41486 , when using this, set the document language to
41491 \begin_layout Description
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41497 \begin_inset space ~
41500 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41505 , when using this, set the document language to
41508 \begin_inset space ~
41514 \begin_layout Description
41516 \begin_inset space ~
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41523 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41529 \begin_inset Index idx
41532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41534 -packages ! japanese
41539 , when using this, set the document language to
41544 \begin_layout Description
41546 \begin_inset space ~
41550 \begin_inset space ~
41553 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41558 , when using this, set the document language to
41563 \begin_layout Description
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41569 \begin_inset space ~
41572 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41577 , when using this, set the document language to
41582 \begin_layout Description
41584 \begin_inset space ~
41587 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41590 \begin_layout Description
41592 \begin_inset space ~
41596 \begin_inset space ~
41600 \begin_inset space ~
41603 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41606 \begin_layout Description
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41612 \begin_inset space ~
41616 \begin_inset space ~
41619 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41620 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41621 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41624 \begin_layout Description
41626 \begin_inset space ~
41630 \begin_inset space ~
41636 \begin_layout Description
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41645 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41646 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41649 \begin_layout Description
41651 \begin_inset space ~
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41658 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41664 \begin_inset Index idx
41667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41674 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41677 \begin_layout Description
41679 \begin_inset space ~
41687 \begin_inset space ~
41690 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41697 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41700 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41707 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41708 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41710 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41713 \begin_layout Description
41715 \begin_inset space ~
41719 \begin_inset space ~
41722 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41728 \begin_inset Index idx
41731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41738 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41741 \begin_layout Description
41743 \begin_inset space ~
41746 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41752 \begin_inset Index idx
41755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41757 -packages ! inputenc
41763 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41767 \begin_layout Description
41769 \begin_inset space ~
41773 \begin_inset space ~
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41780 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41781 \begin_inset space ~
41787 \begin_layout Description
41789 \begin_inset space ~
41793 \begin_inset space ~
41797 \begin_inset space ~
41800 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41801 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41802 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41806 \begin_layout Description
41808 \begin_inset space ~
41812 \begin_inset space ~
41816 \begin_inset space ~
41819 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41820 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41823 \begin_layout Section
41825 \begin_inset Index idx
41828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41835 \begin_inset Index idx
41838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41845 \begin_inset Index idx
41848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41849 Color ! Shaded boxes
41855 \begin_inset Index idx
41858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41859 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41867 \begin_layout Standard
41868 Here you can alter the font color for the
41872 (default: black), for
41875 \begin_inset space ~
41880 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41884 (default: white) and for
41887 \begin_inset space ~
41897 sets the color back to the default.
41900 \begin_layout Standard
41901 Clicking any button showing
41909 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41910 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41911 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41912 later more quickly.
41915 \begin_layout Standard
41916 Note, if you change the
41919 \begin_inset space ~
41924 font color and use the option
41927 \begin_inset space ~
41932 in the document settings under
41935 \begin_inset space ~
41940 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41947 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41954 \begin_layout Standard
41955 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41961 \begin_layout Standard
41965 \begin_inset space ~
41974 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41977 \begin_inset space ~
41980 Code after a forced page break:
41983 \begin_layout Itemize
41984 For the page color:
41985 \begin_inset Newline newline
41992 pagecolor{color name}
41995 \begin_layout Itemize
41996 For the text color:
41997 \begin_inset Newline newline
42007 \begin_layout Standard
42008 You are restricted to one of
42044 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42051 \begin_inset space ~
42057 \begin_inset Newline newline
42060 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42061 names to refer to them:
42064 \begin_layout Itemize
42070 \begin_inset Newline newline
42075 page_backgroundcolor
42078 \begin_layout Itemize
42082 \begin_inset space ~
42088 \begin_inset Newline newline
42096 \begin_layout Itemize
42100 \begin_inset space ~
42106 \begin_inset Newline newline
42114 \begin_layout Itemize
42118 \begin_inset space ~
42124 \begin_inset Newline newline
42132 \begin_layout Standard
42133 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42136 \begin_inset space ~
42144 \begin_inset space ~
42152 \begin_layout Section
42156 \begin_layout Standard
42157 Here you can adjust the
42161 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42165 as described in section
42166 \begin_inset space ~
42170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42172 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42179 \begin_layout Section
42183 \begin_layout Standard
42184 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42190 \begin_inset Index idx
42193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42205 \begin_inset Index idx
42208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42210 -packages ! jurabib
42218 Sectioned bibliography
42220 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42226 \begin_inset Index idx
42229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42231 -packages ! bibtopic
42236 and you can select a
42240 for the generation of the bibliography.
42241 For a further description see section
42242 \begin_inset space ~
42246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42248 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42255 \begin_layout Section
42259 \begin_layout Standard
42260 Here you can define the
42264 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42266 \begin_inset space ~
42270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42272 reference "sec:Index"
42279 \begin_layout Section
42283 \begin_layout Standard
42284 The PDF properties are explained in section
42285 \begin_inset space ~
42289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42291 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42298 \begin_layout Section
42302 \begin_layout Standard
42303 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42304 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42310 \begin_inset Index idx
42313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42315 -packages ! amsmath
42325 \begin_inset Index idx
42328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42330 -packages ! amssymb
42340 \begin_inset Index idx
42343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42355 \begin_inset Index idx
42358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42370 \begin_inset Index idx
42373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42375 -packages ! mathdots
42385 \begin_inset Index idx
42388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42390 -packages ! mathtools
42400 \begin_inset Index idx
42403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42415 \begin_inset Index idx
42418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42420 -packages ! stackrel
42430 \begin_inset Index idx
42433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42435 -packages ! stmaryrd
42445 \begin_inset Index idx
42448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42450 -packages ! undertilde
42455 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42458 \begin_layout Description
42459 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42460 -errors in formulas,
42461 ensure that you have this enabled.
42464 \begin_layout Description
42465 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42466 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42467 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42471 \begin_layout Description
42472 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42475 \begin_inset space ~
42487 \begin_layout Description
42488 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42491 \begin_inset space ~
42503 \begin_layout Description
42504 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42515 \begin_layout Description
42516 mathtools is used for the math commands
42552 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42559 \begin_layout Description
42560 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42562 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42571 \begin_layout Description
42572 stackrel is used for the math command
42589 \begin_layout Description
42590 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42593 \begin_layout Description
42594 undertilde is used for the math command
42602 Accents for one Character
42611 \begin_layout Section
42615 \begin_layout Standard
42616 The float placement options are described in the section
42619 \begin_inset space ~
42627 \begin_inset space ~
42635 \begin_layout Section
42639 \begin_layout Standard
42640 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42642 Program Code Listings
42647 \begin_inset space ~
42655 \begin_layout Section
42659 \begin_layout Standard
42660 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42668 set to be used and set the
42673 The itemize environment is described in section
42674 \begin_inset space ~
42678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42680 reference "sec:Itemize"
42687 \begin_layout Standard
42688 You can furthermore specify a
42691 \begin_inset space ~
42696 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42697 command of the desired character.
42698 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42705 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42711 \begin_inset space \space{}
42715 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42725 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42726 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42729 \begin_layout Standard
42730 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42738 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42739 -packages in the preamble (menu
42742 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42743 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42746 \begin_inset space ~
42752 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42756 usepackage{textcomp}
42759 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42763 usepackage{amssymb}
42773 \begin_layout Section
42777 \begin_layout Standard
42778 Branches are described in section
42779 \begin_inset space ~
42783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42785 reference "sec:Branches"
42792 \begin_layout Section
42794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42796 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
42803 \begin_layout Standard
42804 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42807 \begin_layout Description
42809 \begin_inset space ~
42813 \begin_inset space ~
42816 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42836 View Master Document
42837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42844 Update Master Document
42845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42852 menu or the toolbar.
42853 The default is set in
42855 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42856 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42858 \begin_inset space ~
42861 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42865 \begin_inset space ~
42869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42871 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42878 \begin_layout Description
42880 \begin_inset space ~
42884 \begin_inset space ~
42887 Output settings for the menu
42889 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42891 \begin_inset space ~
42897 For a detailed description see section
42899 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42904 \begin_inset space ~
42912 \begin_layout Description
42914 \begin_inset space ~
42918 \begin_inset space ~
42921 Options offers settings for the export format
42929 \begin_inset space ~
42934 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42935 \begin_inset space ~
42938 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42942 \begin_inset space ~
42947 settings are described in detail in section
42949 Math Output in XHTML
42954 \begin_inset space ~
42963 \begin_inset space ~
42967 \begin_inset space ~
42972 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42975 \begin_layout Description
42977 \begin_inset space ~
42982 Save transient properties
42984 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
42985 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
42986 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
42990 \begin_layout Itemize
42991 the activation of change tracking
42994 \begin_layout Itemize
42995 the output of tracked changes
42998 \begin_layout Itemize
42999 the recording of the document directory path.
43002 \begin_layout Standard
43003 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
43004 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
43008 \begin_layout Section
43016 \begin_layout Standard
43017 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43019 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43021 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43023 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43027 \begin_layout Standard
43028 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43029 -syntax is given in section
43030 \begin_inset space ~
43034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43036 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43043 \begin_layout Chapter
43049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43051 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43056 \begin_inset Index idx
43059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43068 \begin_layout Standard
43069 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43071 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43075 It has the following submenus.
43078 \begin_layout Section
43082 \begin_layout Subsection
43086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43087 User Interface File
43088 \begin_inset Index idx
43091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43092 Customization ! of toolbars
43098 \begin_inset Index idx
43101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43102 Customization ! of menus
43110 \begin_layout Standard
43111 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43112 interface (ui) file.
43113 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43121 \begin_layout Description
43126 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43129 \begin_layout Description
43136 the menu entries in popup context menus
43139 \begin_layout Description
43144 specifies the toolbar buttons
43147 \begin_layout Standard
43148 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43149 and edit the entries.
43152 \begin_layout Standard
43153 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43165 entries must be finished with an explicit
43190 and in the case of the
43191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43203 The syntax for the entries is:
43206 \begin_layout Standard
43207 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43236 \begin_layout Standard
43238 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43241 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43242 -functions are listed in the menu
43244 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43246 \begin_inset space ~
43254 \begin_layout Standard
43255 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43261 \begin_layout Standard
43262 For example, assuming you use the menu
43264 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43267 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43271 \begin_layout Standard
43272 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43296 \begin_layout Standard
43298 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43313 to have the sixth bookmark.
43316 \begin_layout Standard
43320 \begin_inset space ~
43325 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43326 's toolbar buttons.
43327 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43328 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43331 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43342 \begin_layout Standard
43345 Enable tool tips in main work area
43347 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43351 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43355 \begin_layout Standard
43360 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43361 should display in the menu
43363 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43365 \begin_inset space ~
43373 \begin_layout Subsection
43377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43381 \begin_layout Standard
43384 Restore window layouts and geometries
43387 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43388 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43392 \begin_layout Standard
43395 Restore cursor positions
43397 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43401 \begin_layout Standard
43404 Load opened files from last session
43406 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43410 \begin_layout Standard
43413 Clear all session information
43415 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43416 sessions (cursor positions, names
43417 of last opened documents, etc.).
43420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43424 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43429 \begin_inset Index idx
43432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43441 \begin_layout Standard
43444 Backup original documents when saving
43446 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43447 it was saved the last time.
43448 It is stored in the
43451 \begin_inset space ~
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43463 reference "sec:Paths"
43467 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43470 \begin_inset space ~
43476 The backup file has the file extension
43477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43491 \begin_layout Standard
43494 Backup documents, every
43496 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43499 \begin_layout Standard
43502 Save documents compressed by default
43504 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43511 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43516 This applies to newly created documents only.
43517 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43521 Windows & work area
43524 \begin_layout Standard
43527 Open documents in tabs
43529 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43533 \begin_layout Standard
43538 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43545 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43551 reference "sec:Paths"
43555 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43562 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43563 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43564 of \SpecialChar LyX
43566 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43567 instance is created for each file.
43570 \begin_layout Standard
43573 Single close-tab button
43575 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43585 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43586 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43589 \begin_layout Standard
43590 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43598 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43599 before the change takes effect.
43607 \begin_layout Standard
43612 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43614 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43616 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43620 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43621 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43622 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43625 \begin_layout Subsection
43627 \begin_inset Index idx
43630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43639 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43646 \begin_layout Standard
43647 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43651 \begin_layout Standard
43652 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43660 This section only deals with the fonts
43664 the \SpecialChar LyX
43666 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43669 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43670 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43681 \begin_layout Standard
43682 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43699 (depends on the system) as its
43702 \begin_inset space ~
43718 \begin_layout Standard
43719 You can change the font size with the
43726 \begin_layout Standard
43731 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43736 points have the size of 1
43737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43741 \begin_inset space ~
43745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43747 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43752 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43757 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43758 \begin_inset space ~
43762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43764 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43771 \begin_layout Standard
43774 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43776 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43777 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43778 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43779 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43780 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43782 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43789 \begin_layout Subsection
43791 \begin_inset Index idx
43794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43795 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43802 \begin_inset Index idx
43805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43814 \begin_layout Standard
43815 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43816 by choosing an item in the
43817 list and selecting the
43824 \begin_layout Standard
43825 By checking the option
43829 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43832 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43833 \begin_inset space ~
43837 \begin_inset space ~
43842 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43845 \begin_layout Subsection
43847 \begin_inset Index idx
43850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43859 \begin_layout Standard
43860 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43864 \begin_layout Standard
43869 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43870 This feature is described in section
43871 \begin_inset space ~
43875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43877 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43884 \begin_layout Standard
43885 Checking the option
43888 \begin_inset space ~
43892 \begin_inset space ~
43896 \begin_inset space ~
43901 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43904 \begin_layout Section
43906 \begin_inset Index idx
43909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43918 \begin_layout Subsection
43922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43926 \begin_layout Standard
43929 Cursor follows scrollbar
43931 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43935 \begin_layout Standard
43936 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43937 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43938 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43941 \begin_layout Standard
43944 Scroll below end of document
43946 is self-explanatory.
43949 \begin_layout Standard
43950 In \SpecialChar LyX
43951 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43958 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43960 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43961 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43964 \begin_layout Standard
43967 Sort environments alphabetically
43969 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43972 \begin_layout Standard
43975 Group environments by their category
43977 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43980 \begin_layout Standard
43985 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43996 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44000 \begin_layout Standard
44001 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44006 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44007 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44011 \begin_layout Subsection
44013 \begin_inset Index idx
44016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44023 \begin_inset Index idx
44026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44027 Settings ! Shortcuts
44035 \begin_layout Standard
44040 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44042 Several binding files are available, among them:
44045 \begin_layout Description
44046 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44049 \begin_layout Description
44050 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44062 \begin_layout Description
44063 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44074 \begin_layout Standard
44075 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44080 , and binding files for special languages.
44081 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44086 \begin_inset space \space{}
44090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44098 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44099 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44100 will try to use the appropriate binding
44104 \begin_layout Standard
44105 Some binding files, like
44109 , only have a limited scope.
44110 When looking at the end of the file
44114 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44117 \begin_layout Standard
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44130 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44131 in the selected key binding file.
44134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44138 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44143 \begin_inset Index idx
44146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44147 Key Bindings ! Editing
44155 \begin_layout Standard
44156 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44157 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44158 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44159 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44162 Show key-bindings containing
44165 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44166 Insert there for example as keyword
44167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44174 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44175 functions that contain
44176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44184 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44185 All \SpecialChar LyX
44186 functions are also listed in the file
44191 that you will find in the
44198 \begin_layout Standard
44199 For example, to add the shortcut
44207 , select the function and press the
44212 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44213 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44216 \begin_layout Standard
44217 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44218 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44220 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44221 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44223 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44228 \begin_layout Standard
44229 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44232 \begin_layout Standard
44233 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44235 The syntax of the entries is:
44238 \begin_layout Standard
44244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44263 \begin_layout Subsection
44265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44267 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44272 \begin_inset Index idx
44275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44282 \begin_inset Index idx
44285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44286 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44294 \begin_layout Standard
44295 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44296 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44297 provides keyboard maps.
44298 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44299 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44302 \begin_inset space ~
44306 \begin_inset space ~
44311 and select the keyboard map file named
44318 \begin_layout Standard
44327 keyboard map and, if you use the
44331 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44334 arg "keymap-primary"
44340 arg "keymap-secondary"
44343 respectively or toggle between them with
44346 arg "keymap-toggle"
44352 \begin_layout Standard
44353 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44361 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44370 \begin_layout Standard
44371 You can also specify the mouse
44373 Wheel scrolling speed
44376 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44380 Middle mouse button pasting
44382 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44383 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44386 \begin_layout Standard
44394 \begin_inset space ~
44398 \begin_inset space ~
44403 you can select a key for zooming.
44404 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44407 \begin_layout Subsection
44411 \begin_layout Standard
44412 Input completion is described in section
44413 \begin_inset space ~
44417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44419 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44426 \begin_layout Section
44428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44435 \begin_inset Index idx
44438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44445 \begin_inset Index idx
44448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44457 \begin_layout Standard
44458 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44459 are normally determined during
44461 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44464 \begin_layout Description
44466 \begin_inset space ~
44469 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44470 's working directory.
44471 It is the default when you
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44490 \begin_layout Description
44492 \begin_inset space ~
44495 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44497 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44499 \begin_inset space ~
44503 \begin_inset space ~
44511 \begin_layout Description
44513 \begin_inset space ~
44516 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44522 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44526 \begin_inset Newline newline
44530 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44542 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44543 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44551 \begin_layout Description
44553 \begin_inset space ~
44557 \begin_inset Index idx
44560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44566 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44567 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44568 \begin_inset space ~
44572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44574 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44582 will be used to save the backups.
44583 \begin_inset Newline newline
44586 Backup files have the ending
44587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44597 \begin_layout Description
44599 \begin_inset space ~
44602 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44603 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44605 \begin_inset Newline newline
44612 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44618 You can edit this file with the program
44627 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44628 in its preferences under
44631 \begin_inset space ~
44637 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44642 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44644 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44645 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44651 and \SpecialChar LyX
44652 need to be running the same time.
44653 \begin_inset Newline newline
44656 The pipe is also used for the
44660 feature, see section
44661 \begin_inset space ~
44665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44667 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44672 \begin_inset Newline newline
44675 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44676 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44677 \begin_inset Newline newline
44693 \begin_layout Description
44695 \begin_inset space ~
44698 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44701 \begin_layout Description
44703 \begin_inset space ~
44706 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44707 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44708 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44711 \begin_layout Description
44713 \begin_inset space ~
44716 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44722 You only need to specify it if you are using
44726 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44728 For \SpecialChar LyX
44733 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44737 \begin_layout Description
44739 \begin_inset space ~
44742 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44743 When \SpecialChar LyX
44744 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44745 to find it on the system.
44746 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44748 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44757 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44758 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44761 \begin_layout Description
44763 \begin_inset space ~
44766 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44767 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44768 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44769 code or in the document
44771 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44773 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44774 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44775 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44776 scanned for the input files.
44777 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44778 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44780 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44781 compilation may fail for some documents.
44784 \begin_layout Section
44788 \begin_layout Standard
44789 Here you can insert your
44798 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44800 \begin_inset space ~
44804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44806 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44810 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44813 \begin_layout Section
44815 \begin_inset Index idx
44818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44819 Language ! Settings
44825 \begin_inset Index idx
44828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44829 Settings ! Language
44837 \begin_layout Subsection
44839 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44841 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44848 \begin_layout Description
44850 \begin_inset space ~
44854 \begin_inset space ~
44857 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44859 You can find its actual translation status here:
44860 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44862 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44869 \begin_layout Description
44871 \begin_inset space ~
44874 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44875 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44876 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44877 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44894 The most widespread language package is
44899 \begin_inset Index idx
44902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44909 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44911 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44912 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44913 come with the alternative
44919 \begin_inset Index idx
44922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44924 -packages ! polyglossia
44929 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44930 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44936 The available selections are described in section
44937 \begin_inset space ~
44941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44943 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44950 \begin_layout Description
44952 \begin_inset space ~
44955 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44956 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44957 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44958 An example is the start command
44964 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44966 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44970 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44985 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44990 \begin_layout Description
44992 \begin_inset space ~
45000 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45001 command toggles the package on and off.
45004 \begin_layout Description
45006 \begin_inset space ~
45010 \begin_inset space ~
45013 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45017 \begin_layout Description
45019 \begin_inset space ~
45023 \begin_inset space ~
45026 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45030 \begin_layout Description
45032 \begin_inset space ~
45036 \begin_inset space ~
45039 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45040 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45041 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45043 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45050 \begin_layout Description
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45055 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45057 When this option is not set, the
45060 \begin_inset space ~
45065 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45067 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45070 \begin_inset space ~
45078 \begin_layout Description
45080 \begin_inset space ~
45086 \begin_inset space ~
45092 When it is not set, the
45095 \begin_inset space ~
45100 is set to the end of the document.
45103 \begin_layout Description
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45112 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45113 language will be underlined in blue.
45116 \begin_layout Description
45118 \begin_inset space ~
45122 \begin_inset space ~
45125 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45126 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45129 \begin_layout Description
45131 \begin_inset space ~
45134 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45135 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45136 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45137 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45140 \begin_layout Subsection
45144 \begin_layout Standard
45145 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45146 \begin_inset space ~
45150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45152 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45159 \begin_layout Section
45163 \begin_layout Subsection
45165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45167 name "subsec:General-output"
45174 \begin_layout Description
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45179 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45181 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45183 \begin_inset space ~
45189 For a detailed description see section
45191 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45196 \begin_inset space ~
45204 \begin_layout Description
45206 \begin_inset space ~
45209 Options Options for the program
45213 that is used for the export format
45218 \begin_inset space ~
45222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45224 reference "subsec:Export"
45229 Possible options are listed in the
45234 \begin_inset Newline newline
45238 \begin_inset Flex URL
45241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45243 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45253 \begin_layout Description
45255 \begin_inset space ~
45259 \begin_inset space ~
45262 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45265 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45266 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45274 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45277 \begin_layout Description
45279 \begin_inset space ~
45283 \begin_inset Index idx
45286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45293 \begin_inset Index idx
45296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45297 Settings ! Date format
45302 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45303 \begin_inset Newline newline
45307 \begin_inset Flex URL
45310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45312 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45318 \begin_inset Newline newline
45321 For example the format
45322 \begin_inset Newline newline
45326 \begin_inset Newline newline
45329 prints the date as day/month/year.
45332 \begin_layout Description
45334 \begin_inset space ~
45338 \begin_inset space ~
45341 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45342 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45345 \begin_layout Subsection
45351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45353 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45358 \begin_inset Index idx
45361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45362 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45371 \begin_layout Description
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45381 \begin_inset space ~
45385 \begin_inset space ~
45388 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45393 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45414 are used for Cyrillic.
45415 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45428 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45430 sets up in the background.
45431 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45434 \begin_layout Description
45436 \begin_inset space ~
45440 \begin_inset space ~
45444 \begin_inset space ~
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45451 options They only have an effect when the program
45455 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45458 \begin_layout Standard
45459 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45460 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45461 manuals of the applications.
45464 \begin_layout Description
45466 \begin_inset space ~
45469 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45470 \begin_inset space ~
45474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45476 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45483 \begin_layout Description
45485 \begin_inset space ~
45488 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45495 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45502 \begin_layout Description
45504 \begin_inset space ~
45507 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45514 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45521 \begin_layout Description
45527 \begin_inset space ~
45530 command Command for the program
45532 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45535 that is described in the section
45537 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45542 Additional Features
45547 \begin_layout Standard
45548 There are additionally the following options:
45551 \begin_layout Description
45553 \begin_inset space ~
45557 \begin_inset space ~
45561 \begin_inset space ~
45565 \begin_inset space ~
45570 \begin_inset space ~
45573 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45591 to separate folders.
45592 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45594 \begin_inset Index idx
45597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45604 \begin_inset Index idx
45607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45616 \begin_layout Description
45618 \begin_inset space ~
45622 \begin_inset space ~
45626 \begin_inset space ~
45630 \begin_inset space ~
45634 \begin_inset space ~
45638 \begin_inset space ~
45641 changes Removes all manually set
45647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45648 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45650 \begin_inset space ~
45655 dialog when changing the document class.
45658 \begin_layout Section
45660 \begin_inset space ~
45664 \begin_inset Index idx
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45676 \begin_layout Subsection
45678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45680 name "subsec:Converters"
45685 \begin_inset Index idx
45688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45697 \begin_layout Standard
45698 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45699 from one format to another.
45700 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45701 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45708 \begin_inset space ~
45713 field and press the
45718 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45722 \begin_inset space ~
45727 drop-down list, modify the
45731 field and press the
45738 \begin_layout Standard
45741 Converter File Cache
45747 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45749 Maximum Age (in days
45752 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45753 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45756 \begin_layout Standard
45757 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45758 definition, is described in the section
45769 \begin_layout Subsection
45771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45773 name "sec:File-Formats"
45778 \begin_inset Index idx
45781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45788 \begin_inset Index idx
45791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45800 \begin_layout Standard
45801 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45811 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45814 \begin_layout Standard
45815 You can also define the
45817 Default output format
45819 that is used when you use
45821 View, Update, View Master Document
45825 Update Master Document
45831 menu or the toolbar.
45834 \begin_layout Standard
45835 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45846 \begin_layout Standard
45847 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45849 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45850 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45851 This is done by specifying a
45856 More about this is described in the section
45867 \begin_layout Chapter
45868 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45870 \begin_inset Index idx
45873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45882 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45889 \begin_layout Standard
45891 \begin_inset space ~
45895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45897 reference "tab:Units"
45901 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45902 and used in this documentation.
45905 \begin_layout Standard
45906 \begin_inset Float table
45912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45913 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45931 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45939 \begin_inset Tabular
45940 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45941 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45942 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45943 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46150 scaled point (65536
46151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46229 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46302 % of original image width
46307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46618 \begin_layout Chapter
46620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46622 name "chap:Credits"
46629 \begin_layout Standard
46630 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46631 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46634 \begin_layout Itemize
46637 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46640 \begin_layout Itemize
46646 \begin_layout Itemize
46652 \begin_layout Itemize
46658 \begin_layout Itemize
46664 \begin_layout Itemize
46670 \begin_layout Itemize
46676 \begin_layout Itemize
46682 \begin_layout Itemize
46685 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46688 \begin_layout Itemize
46694 \begin_layout Itemize
46700 \begin_layout Itemize
46706 \begin_layout Itemize
46712 \begin_layout Itemize
46718 \begin_layout Itemize
46724 \begin_layout Itemize
46730 \begin_layout Itemize
46736 \begin_layout Itemize
46737 The \SpecialChar LyX
46739 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46748 \begin_layout Standard
46749 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46752 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46759 \begin_layout Bibliography
46760 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46761 LatexCommand bibitem
46767 The \SpecialChar LyX
46769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46772 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46777 \begin_inset Newline newline
46781 \begin_inset Flex URL
46784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46786 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46794 \begin_layout Bibliography
46795 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46796 LatexCommand bibitem
46797 key "latexcompanion"
46801 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46803 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46804 Companion Second Edition.
46807 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46810 \begin_layout Bibliography
46811 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46812 LatexCommand bibitem
46817 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46820 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46824 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46827 \begin_layout Bibliography
46828 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46829 LatexCommand bibitem
46837 : A Document Preparation System.
46840 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46843 \begin_layout Bibliography
46844 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46845 LatexCommand bibitem
46854 The \SpecialChar TeX
46858 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46861 \begin_layout Bibliography
46862 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46863 LatexCommand bibitem
46868 The \SpecialChar TeX
46870 \begin_inset Newline newline
46874 \begin_inset Flex URL
46877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46879 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46887 \begin_layout Bibliography
46888 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46889 LatexCommand bibitem
46894 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46896 \begin_inset Newline newline
46900 \begin_inset Flex URL
46903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46905 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46913 \begin_layout Bibliography
46914 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46915 LatexCommand bibitem
46921 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46923 name "Documentation"
46924 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46930 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46934 \begin_inset Newline newline
46938 \begin_inset Flex URL
46941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46943 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46951 \begin_layout Bibliography
46952 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46953 LatexCommand bibitem
46959 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46961 name "Documentation"
46962 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46966 how to use the program
46968 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46972 \begin_inset Newline newline
46976 \begin_inset Flex URL
46979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46981 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46989 \begin_layout Bibliography
46990 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46991 LatexCommand bibitem
46997 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46999 name "Documentation"
47000 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47009 \begin_inset Newline newline
47013 \begin_inset Flex URL
47016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47018 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47026 \begin_layout Bibliography
47027 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47028 LatexCommand bibitem
47029 key "makeindex-man"
47034 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47037 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
47046 \begin_inset Newline newline
47050 \begin_inset Flex URL
47053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47055 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47063 \begin_layout Bibliography
47064 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47065 LatexCommand bibitem
47071 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47073 name "Documentation"
47074 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47083 \begin_inset Newline newline
47087 \begin_inset Flex URL
47090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47092 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47100 \begin_layout Bibliography
47101 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47102 LatexCommand bibitem
47108 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47110 name "Documentation"
47111 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47115 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47117 \begin_inset Newline newline
47121 \begin_inset Flex URL
47124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47126 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47134 \begin_layout Bibliography
47135 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47136 LatexCommand bibitem
47142 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47144 name "Documentation"
47145 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47149 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47155 \begin_inset Index idx
47158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47160 -packages ! caption
47166 \begin_inset Newline newline
47170 \begin_inset Flex URL
47173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47175 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47183 \begin_layout Bibliography
47184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47185 LatexCommand bibitem
47191 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47193 name "Documentation"
47194 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47198 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47204 \begin_inset Index idx
47207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47209 -packages ! enumitem
47215 \begin_inset Newline newline
47219 \begin_inset Flex URL
47222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47224 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47232 \begin_layout Bibliography
47233 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47234 LatexCommand bibitem
47240 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47242 name "Documentation"
47243 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47247 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47253 \begin_inset Index idx
47256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47258 -packages ! fancyhdr
47264 \begin_inset Newline newline
47268 \begin_inset Flex URL
47271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47273 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47281 \begin_layout Bibliography
47282 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47283 LatexCommand bibitem
47289 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47291 name "Documentation"
47292 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47296 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47302 \begin_inset Index idx
47305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47307 -packages ! hyperref
47313 \begin_inset Newline newline
47317 \begin_inset Flex URL
47320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47322 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47330 \begin_layout Bibliography
47331 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47332 LatexCommand bibitem
47338 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47340 name "Documentation"
47341 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47345 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47351 \begin_inset Index idx
47354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47356 -packages ! nomencl
47362 \begin_inset Newline newline
47366 \begin_inset Flex URL
47369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47371 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47379 \begin_layout Bibliography
47380 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47381 LatexCommand bibitem
47387 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47389 name "Documentation"
47390 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47394 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47400 \begin_inset Index idx
47403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47405 -packages ! prettyref
47411 \begin_inset Newline newline
47415 \begin_inset Flex URL
47418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47420 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47428 \begin_layout Bibliography
47429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47430 LatexCommand bibitem
47436 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47438 name "Documentation"
47439 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47443 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47449 \begin_inset Index idx
47452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47454 -packages ! refstyle
47460 \begin_inset Newline newline
47464 \begin_inset Flex URL
47467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47469 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47477 \begin_layout Bibliography
47478 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47479 LatexCommand bibitem
47485 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47488 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47492 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47494 \begin_inset Newline newline
47498 \begin_inset Flex URL
47501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47503 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47511 \begin_layout Bibliography
47512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47513 LatexCommand bibitem
47519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47522 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47526 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47528 \begin_inset Newline newline
47532 \begin_inset Flex URL
47535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47537 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47545 \begin_layout Bibliography
47546 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47547 LatexCommand bibitem
47553 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47556 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47560 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47561 for Cyrillic languages:
47562 \begin_inset Newline newline
47566 \begin_inset Flex URL
47569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47571 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47579 \begin_layout Bibliography
47580 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47581 LatexCommand bibitem
47587 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47590 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47594 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47596 \begin_inset Newline newline
47600 \begin_inset Flex URL
47603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47605 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47613 \begin_layout Bibliography
47614 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47615 LatexCommand bibitem
47621 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47624 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47628 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47630 \begin_inset Newline newline
47634 \begin_inset Flex URL
47637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47639 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47647 \begin_layout Bibliography
47648 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47649 LatexCommand bibitem
47655 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47658 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47662 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47664 \begin_inset Newline newline
47668 \begin_inset Flex URL
47671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47673 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47681 \begin_layout Bibliography
47682 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47683 LatexCommand bibitem
47689 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47692 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47696 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47698 \begin_inset Newline newline
47702 \begin_inset Flex URL
47705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47707 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47715 \begin_layout Bibliography
47716 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47717 LatexCommand bibitem
47723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47726 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47730 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47732 \begin_inset Newline newline
47736 \begin_inset Flex URL
47739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47741 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47749 \begin_layout Bibliography
47750 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47751 LatexCommand bibitem
47757 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47760 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47764 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47766 \begin_inset Newline newline
47770 \begin_inset Flex URL
47773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47775 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47783 \begin_layout Bibliography
47784 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47785 LatexCommand bibitem
47791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47794 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47798 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47800 \begin_inset Newline newline
47804 \begin_inset Flex URL
47807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47809 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47817 \begin_layout Bibliography
47818 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47819 LatexCommand bibitem
47825 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47828 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47832 about new features in
47838 \begin_inset Newline newline
47842 \begin_inset Flex URL
47845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47847 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47855 \begin_layout Standard
47856 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47890 \begin_inset Note Note
47893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47900 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47901 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47902 bibliography is the second one:
47910 \begin_layout Standard
47911 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47912 LatexCommand bibtex
47913 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47914 options "biblio/alphadin"
47921 \begin_layout Standard
47922 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47926 \begin_layout Standard
47927 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47928 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47934 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47935 LatexCommand printindex